JP2013135708A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To raise a player's expectation for occurrence of a state where a game ball is guided to a start winning device, thereby consequently enhancing the amusement of a game.SOLUTION: When a second special game state occurs in a predetermined probability state by a variable display game based on winning entry of a game ball into a start winning device 37 in which a winning facilitating state has been produced by a winning facilitating state generation means 100, a game machine 10 can control the probability state after finishing the second special game state, according to a winning entry mode of a game ball into a variable winning device 38 that has been converted into a second state at the occurrence of the second special game state.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and the like, and in particular, executes a variable display game that varies a plurality of identification information based on winning of a game ball in a start winning area in the gaming area In addition, the present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state that gives a predetermined game value to a player when the result of the variable display game is a special result.

  Conventionally, this type of gaming machine is equipped with a special variable winning device (large winning opening) that can convert a gaming ball into a first state in which a winning is impossible and a second state in which a winning is possible, and a specific big hit state Until the big hit occurs again from the end of the (special gaming state), a normal electric accessory having a special symbol starting port for a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) or only for a predetermined time (ordinary variable winning device: ordinary electric power) Is known to be able to generate an easy-to-win mode (open time extension mode: ordinary power support) that makes it easy to win a game ball by extending the open time when it is open. Reference 1).

  Also, in this easy-to-win mode, on the basis of the winning of a game ball to a normal electric accessory (special symbol start opening), a shortened variation in which the execution time of the variable display game performed on the special symbol display device is shortened than usual. The execution right (holding memory) of the variable display game that occurs many times as the game balls are executed in time and the winning of the game ball to the ordinary electric game becomes easy is efficiently digested.

JP-A-8-332265

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since the occurrence of the big hit state is set as the generation condition of the easy winning mode (general power support) by the ordinary electric accessory, this easy winning mode is difficult to generate, for example, the big win. When applied to a gaming machine, the winning easy mode is not easily executed. That is, in the easy-to-win mode with such generation conditions, there is a concern that a large difference may occur in the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win mode due to the number of big hit states for each gaming machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine as described above is provided with another start winning opening that allows a game ball to be always won without opening and closing, and based on winning (special figure 2 winning) for an ordinary electric accessory (general power). The game value that is given when a big win is won in a variable display game performed in the same way, and the game value that is given when a big win is based on the winning of a game ball to another start winning opening (Special Figure 1 winning) Generally, it is set higher than this. For this reason, it is speculated that the majority of players want to play a variable display game based on winnings to the ordinary electric game as much as possible, but in the normal gaming state in which the easy winning mode is not generated, It is generally difficult to win a game ball in an ordinary electric accessory because the probability of winning a general figure in an open state (general power open right acquisition) is generally set to be very low.

  Then, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, if a state where a specific jackpot does not occur during the game continues, there is an increasing sense of expectation that the ordinary electric accessory will be in an open state or that an easy winning mode will occur. It is highly conceivable that the game will be lost and the expectation and interest of the entire game will be attenuated, and the player will soon end the game.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and executes a special variation display game that varies identification information based on a winning of a game ball in a start winning area, and a special variation display game. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a player a predetermined gaming value when the result of is a special result, a state in which a game ball is guided to the start winning area in the normal gaming state (easy winning mode) The main purpose is to provide a gaming machine that increases the player's expectation that the ordinary electric accessory will be in an open state due to the occurrence of the occurrence of the game, and as a result, can further enhance the interest of the game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1
A variable display device having a display unit capable of displaying a variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information based on a winning of a game ball in a start winning area in the game area, and a first in which a game ball cannot be won A variable winning device that is convertible to a state and a second state in which a game ball can be won, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, the variable winning device is set to the second state. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that converts and gives a predetermined gaming value to the player,
The start winning area is provided with a start winning device that can be converted into a guided state that guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the start winning area and a non-guided state that does not guide,
The special game state includes a first special game state and a second special game state having a lower game value to be given to the player than the first special game state,
Game execution control means capable of controlling the execution of the variable display game;
A probability state control means capable of controlling a probability state in which the special gaming state occurs in the gaming machine;
An easy-to-win state generating means capable of generating an easy-to-win state for the induction state over a second time longer than a normal state in which the start winning device is in the induction state for a first time; ,
The probability state control means includes:
In a predetermined probability state, when the second special gaming state is generated by a variable display game based on a winning of a game ball to the start winning device in which the winning easy state is generated by the winning easy state generating means,
When the second special gaming state occurs, the probability state after the end of the second special gaming state can be controlled according to the winning mode of the game ball to the variable winning device converted to the second state. It is characterized by being.

  Here, the “game machine” includes a ball game machine such as a pachinko game machine, an arrange ball game machine, a sparrow ball game machine, a pachislot machine or a slot machine. The “variable display device” may be a single device such as a liquid crystal display device, a CRT (cathode ray tube) display device, a display device in which a large number of light emitting elements are arranged, or a mechanical display device using a rotating drum. A combination of these devices may be used as long as the display state can be changed to such an extent that the present invention can be implemented. “Identification information” includes numbers, letters, symbols and characters, and identification patterns (identification marks) that can be visually identified, such as colors.

  In addition, the “variable display game” means, for example, that a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols is moved from the top to the bottom in each of a plurality of variable display regions formed in the variable display device. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display game, the variable display in each variable display area is stopped in a predetermined order and each predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed to derive a display result. Things. The result of the variable display game is “special result” when, for example, a plurality of symbols are in a specific combination state determined in advance such as “2,2,2” or “7,7,7”. Is to stop.

  Furthermore, the “special game state” means that it is easy to acquire a large number of game media (game value) compared to the normal state (a game state other than that in the special game state, including a normal game state, a specific game state, etc.). It refers to a gaming state, for example, a state in which a special variable winning device (big prize opening) in a first type pachinko gaming machine is opened, a state in which rights are generated in a third type pachinko gaming machine, and the like.

  The “predetermined probability state” is the special result in a probability state in which a special gaming state controlled by the probability state control means occurs (in other words, the result of the variable display game becomes a special result). It shows a case of a normal probability state among a low probability state (normal probability state) where the probability is low and a high probability state where the probability is higher than the normal probability state.

Furthermore, the “winning easy state” means a winning state in which the starting winning device (ordinary variable winning device = general power) is in a guided state for a second time longer than a normal state in which the starting state is in a guided state for the first time. This is a facilitating mode, and in essence, it is a state in which the open time of the normal power is set longer (or extended) than usual. In other words, the winning easy state is a state that is generally referred to as a normal power support state, a power support state, a normal long open state, etc. in a normal power short time operation state, which is open longer than the normal operation state. In the same way as, it is a state in which the opening time of the public train is extended. However, the normal power support state, the electric chew support state, the normal long open state, etc. are generated in the so-called probability change state / short time state in the game state, whereas in the present invention, the normal power state is generated. Is different.
In addition, “the winning mode of the game ball to the variable winning device” means that the number of game balls won to the variable winning device, the winning timing, or a specific area in the variable winning device is provided, It includes a passing mode of a game ball (for example, a specified number of passes in a specified round).

  According to the invention described in claim 1, a variable display device having a display unit capable of displaying a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning area in the game area , A variable winning device that can be converted into a first state (blocked state) in which game balls cannot be won and a second state (open state) in which game balls can be won (special variable winning device: special electric accessory ( When the result of the variable display game is a special result, the variable winning device (large winning port) is converted to the second state to the player. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a predetermined gaming value, the starting winning area includes a guiding state (open state) that guides a game ball flowing down the gaming area to the starting winning area, and a non-guidance that does not guide Can be converted to inductive state (non-open state) A start winning device (ordinary variable winning device: referred to as a normal electric accessory (general power), etc.) is provided, and the special game state includes a first special game state (big hit) and the first special game state. And a game execution control means capable of controlling the execution of the variable display game, and the probability of occurrence of the special game state in the gaming machine. Probability state control means capable of controlling the state, and a winning facilitated state in which the starting winning device is in the guiding state for a second time longer than the normal state in which the starting prize winning device is in the guiding state for the first time (winning winning mode: A state for facilitating winning a winning state that can generate a normal power open time extension mode), and a probability state controlling means for generating a state for facilitating winning a prize in a state in which the probability of occurrence of a special gaming state is a predetermined probability state. By means When the second special gaming state is generated by the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning device in which the winning easy state is generated, the second special gaming state is converted into the second state when the second special gaming state is generated. According to the winning state of the game ball to the variable winning device, the probability state that the special game state occurs after the end of the second special game state can be controlled, so that the probability that the special game state occurs is predetermined. In this probability state, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that a winning easy state that facilitates winning of a game ball to the start winning device will occur, and as a result, the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

  In addition, when a second special game state (small hit) having a lower game value than the first special game state is generated, the winning state of the game ball (the number of winnings and the winning timing) to the variable winning device converted to the second state Etc.), the probability state in which the special gaming state occurs after the end of the second special gaming state is controlled, so that it is possible to provide a new gameability such that the player can set the gaming state himself, The dissatisfaction of the player when the second special gaming state that is low in value and is not welcomed by the player can be eliminated.

The invention according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1,
When the probability state controlled by the probability state control means is a normal probability state,
The winning easy state generating means is:
The winning ease state is generated with a predetermined probability,
The game execution control means includes
In the variable display game based on the winning of a game ball to the start winning device in which the winning easy state is generated by the winning easy state generating means, the start winning area where the easy winning state has not occurred is entered. Generating the second special gaming state with a higher probability than a variable display game based on a winning game ball;
The probability state control means includes:
When the second special gaming state is generated by the game execution control means,
When the second special gaming state occurs, the probability state after the end of the second special gaming state can be controlled according to the number of game balls won in the variable winning device converted to the second state. It is characterized by being.

  According to the invention described in claim 2, when the probability state is the normal probability state, the game ball in the start winning device (ordinary electric accessory (general power): normal variable winning device) is guided to the start winning region. An easy-to-win state (ie, easy-to-win mode: normal power open time extension mode) in which the guiding state (that is, the open state of the start winning device) is longer than normal is generated with a predetermined probability by the easy-to-win state generating means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the winning easy state in the normal probability state occurs. Further, the game execution control means has a higher probability of the second special gaming state (smaller) in the variable display game by the start winning device in the winning facilitated state than the variable display game by the start winning device in the normal state that is not in the easy winning state. Therefore, when the winning facilitated state occurs, it becomes a very desirable situation for the player that the occurrence frequency of the second special gaming state is increased, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced. Furthermore, since the probability state control means controls the gaming state after the end of the second special gaming state by the number of winning game balls to the variable winning device, a new gaming property in which the player himself sets the gaming state is achieved. Can be further enhanced.

The invention according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
The probability state control means includes:
After the end of the first special gaming state, controlling a probability state in which the second special gaming state occurs for a predetermined period, which is higher than the normal probability state,
When the second special game state is generated by the variable display game during the predetermined period, the game ball is awarded to the variable winning device converted to the second state when the second special game state is generated. Accordingly, the probability state after the end of the predetermined period can be controlled.

  According to the third aspect of the present invention, the second special gaming state (small hit) is determined for a predetermined period after the end of the first special gaming state (big hit) by the control of the probability state control means. Since it is generated with a high probability, it becomes a very desirable situation for the player that the frequency of occurrence of the second special gaming state is increased, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced. In addition, when the second special game state is generated by the variable display game in a predetermined period after the first special game state is finished, the variable winning device converted to the second state when the second special game state is generated Since the probability state that the special game state occurs after the end of the predetermined period is controlled according to the winning mode of the game ball to the second special game state, the game value is lower than the first special game state and is not welcomed by the player. Even in the state, the interest can be enhanced, and as a result, the dissatisfaction of the player can be eliminated.

The invention according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 3,
The probability state control means includes:
A plurality of probability states as the controllable probability states;
When the second special game state is generated by the variable display game in the predetermined period, when the second special game state is generated, the number of game balls won in the variable winning device converted to the second state is calculated. Based on this, it is possible to control which probability state of the plurality of probability states is the probability state in which the special gaming state occurs after the end of the predetermined period.

  According to the fourth aspect of the present invention, when the second special gaming state is generated by the variable display game in a predetermined period after the end of the first special gaming state (big hit), the second special gaming state Triggered by the occurrence of a special gaming state after the end of the predetermined period, the number of game balls won in the variable winning device converted to the second state is selected as a selection condition. Since control is performed according to the probability state selected according to the selection condition from among the states, it can be expected that the probability state where the special gaming state occurs after the end of the predetermined period will be shifted to a high probability by aiming to increase the number of winnings. The interest in the second special gaming state, which has a lower gaming value than the first special gaming state and is not welcomed by the player, can be further enhanced.

The invention according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 4,
The plurality of probability states include a plurality of probability states in which the second special gaming state occurs in the predetermined period,
The probability state control means includes:
According to the type of special result in the variable display game that generated the first special gaming state that triggered the start of the predetermined period, the probability state that the second special gaming state will occur in the predetermined period, Any one of a plurality of probability states can be set.

  According to the invention described in claim 5, according to the type of special result (the symbol shown as the special result) of the variable display game that has generated the first special game state (big hit) that triggered the start of the predetermined period. Thus, the probability state in which the second special gaming state (small hit) occurs in the predetermined period can be set to any one of a plurality of probability states. That is, since the probability state of occurrence of the second special gaming state can be varied in a predetermined period according to the symbol shown as the special result, the value of the symbol normally recognized by the player (in other words, even symbol (for example, , “4”) is awarded a bonus corresponding to an odd symbol (for example, “7”) in which the player can obtain a gaming value that is more advantageous for the player). It becomes possible.

The invention according to claim 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The variable winning device is:
A first variable winning device and a second variable winning device;
The control means includes
The first variable winning device and the second variable winning device are appropriately converted into the first state or the second state, respectively, according to the state of the special gaming state to be generated.

  According to the invention described in claim 6, the variable winning device includes the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device, and the control means is configured to generate the special gaming state (that is, the special gaming state). The first variable winning device and the second variable winning device are appropriately converted into the first state or the second state, respectively, according to the special display of the variable display game that generated the game. For example, in the case of winning with even symbols such as “2” and “4”, the first variable winning device is converted to the second state, and in the case of winning with odd symbols such as “3” and “7”, the first variable winning device. By converting the second variable winning device that is easy to win to the 2nd state, the player can achieve advantageous game value by winning with odd symbols, and achieve the achievement according to the general recognition of the player and grant of benefits Can . In addition, since the variable winning device is provided in two places, that is, the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device, the variable winning device has a change in the game mode as compared with the gaming machine having only one place. Since the game performance can be improved as much as possible, and the player can expect a prize ball by placing one second variable prize winning device easier to win than the other first variable prize winning device. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the hitting and to enhance the interest even in the second special game state that is lower in value than the first special game state and is not welcomed by the player.

According to the present invention, there is provided a start winning device that can be converted into a guided state for guiding a game ball in the start winning area and a non-guided state that does not guide, and the probability state control means is a probability state in which a special game state occurs. Is controlled in the normal probability state, and the start winning device is placed in the winning easy state by the winning facilitating generating means capable of generating a winning easy state that makes the starting winning device in a guided state longer than the normal state. As a result of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the game, when the second special game state having a lower game value to be given to the player than the first special game state occurs, the occurrence of the second special game state is triggered The probability state after the end of the second special gaming state can be controlled according to the winning mode of the game ball to the variable winning device converted to the second state, so that the start winning device can be controlled in the normal probability state. Game There enhances the player's expectation against it in a state derived, consequently it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.
In addition, depending on the winning mode (number of winnings, winning timing, etc.) of the game ball to the variable winning device converted to the second state in response to the occurrence of the second special gaming state having a lower gaming value than the first special gaming state Since the probability state of occurrence of the special gaming state after the end of the second special gaming state is controlled, it is possible to provide a new gameability that allows the player to set the gaming state himself, and the value is low. It is possible to eliminate the dissatisfaction of the player when a special game state that is not welcomed by the player occurs.

1 is a perspective view showing a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view which shows the game board provided in the gaming machine of FIG. It is an enlarged explanatory view showing details of the collective display device. It is a block diagram which shows the control system and game control apparatus which are provided in the gaming machine of FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the production | presentation control apparatus of FIG. It is a figure explaining the open time of the embodiment of a usual figure fluctuation display game, and a normal fluctuation prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the special result which can be generated with the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect image displayed in the special figure fluctuation display game of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the first half part of the main process of the embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a continuation of FIG. 9. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure game process of the embodiment. It is a figure which shows the special figure game sequence table of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start port switch monitoring process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure start port switch common process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure pending | holding information determination process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the count switch monitoring process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the count update process at the time of the small hit of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit time count update process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure normal process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit flag 2 setting process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit determination processing of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure change process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure display process of the embodiment. 27 is a flowchart showing a continuation of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the frequency | count update process of the change of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fanfare / interval process transition setting process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the fanfare / interval of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the common figure high probability transfer lottery process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end setting process 1 of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end setting process 2 of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end setting process 3 of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end setting process 4 of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end setting process 5 of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process transition setting process 1 in the small hitting fanfare of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process transition setting process 2 in the small hitting fanfare of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during small hitting fanfare of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the middle hit process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit remaining ball process transfer setting process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process 2 transfer setting process in small hits of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding redetermination process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure normal process transfer setting process 3 of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure pending | holding information redetermination process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the usual game process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the gate switch monitoring process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the usual figure normal process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the common figure hit determination process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during a common figure change of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during normal map display of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st scene control process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the probability information command reception process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch command reception process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the redetermination command reception process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process at the time of the small hit of the embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the operation | movement at the time of performing special drawing 2 small hits lottery in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the frequency update process in the embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows operation at the time of performing a plurality of special figure 2 small hits lottery in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a figure explaining the specific game state which can generate | occur | produce with the gaming machine which concerns on the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end process in the embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of the game performed in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of the game performed in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of the game performed in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of the game performed in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a figure explaining the specific game state which can generate | occur | produce with the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end process in the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure pending | holding information redetermination process of the embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of the game performed in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a figure explaining the specific game state which can generate | occur | produce with the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the count update process at the time of the small hit of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the frequency update process in the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process of the embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of the game in the embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of the game in the embodiment. It is a front view which shows the modification of the game board provided in the game machine of this invention. It is a figure explaining the specific game state which can generate | occur | produce with the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process of the embodiment. It is a figure explaining the jackpot which can generate | occur | produce with the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of 1st invention. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end setting process 1 of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end setting process 2 of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end setting process 3 of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end setting process 4 of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end setting process 5 of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the count switch monitoring process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the second half part of the special figure display process of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the specific variation frequency management process of the embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of the game performed in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the count switch monitoring process of the embodiment modification 1. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the modification. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the count switch monitoring process of the same embodiment modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the count switch monitoring process of the same embodiment modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the specific variation frequency management process of the modification. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the modification. It is a flowchart which shows the count switch monitoring process of 4th Embodiment of 1st invention. It is a flowchart which shows the specific game clock number process of the embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the same embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the same embodiment modification 1. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the modification. It is a figure explaining the open | release aspect of the special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus of the same embodiment modification 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the modification. It is a timing chart explaining the open mode of the special variation prize-winning device of the embodiment modification 3. It is a figure explaining the example of proper use of the opening aspect of the special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus of the same embodiment modification 4. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of proper use of the open mode of the special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus of the same embodiment modification 5. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of proper use of the open mode of the special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus of the same embodiment modification 6. FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the modification. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. It is a timing chart explaining the release mode of the special variation prize-winning device of the embodiment modification 7. It is a timing chart explaining the open mode of the special variation prize-winning device of the modification.

DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

<First Embodiment>
The gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes a main body frame (outer frame) 11 and a front frame (inner frame) 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to the main body frame 11 via a hinge 13 so as to be openable and closable. . The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. A glass frame 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame 12.

  Further, an illuminating device (moving light) 16 having a built-in lamp and motor and a lamp (LED) 17 for paying out abnormality notification are provided in the upper part of the glass frame 15. Further, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, there are provided a frame decoration device 18 with a built-in lamp and the like for emitting light for decoration and production, and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effects). Yes. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12.

  Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, there are an upper plate 21 for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher, and game balls paid out from a ball payout device (not shown) provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. There are provided an upper plate ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower plate 23 that stores game balls that are paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of a ball hitting device, and the like. Further, an effect button 25 having a built-in operation switch for receiving an operation input from the player is provided on the upper edge of the upper plate 21. Further, a key 26 for opening and locking the front frame 12 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.

  In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device directs the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. And fire. Further, when the player operates the effect button 25, an effect or the like in which the player's operation is intervened is performed in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). Can do. Further, on the front surface of the glass frame 15 above the upper plate 21, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when a player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card to be discharged from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28 for operating the balance, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case 40 provided with a display device 41 is disposed substantially at the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41 and is formed to protrude forward from the display surface of the display device 41.

  The display device 41 is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (CRT). A plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, a background image that enhances the effect, and the like are displayed in an area (display area) in which an image of the display screen can be displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

On the left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (ordinary start gate) 34 is provided. Three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40.
In each of the general winning awards 35,.

  Also, below the center case 40 is provided a start winning opening 36 (start winning area) for giving a start condition for the special figure variation display game, and immediately below it is opened in a reverse “C” shape at the top. An ordinary variable prize winning device (general power (ordinary electric accessory), starting prize winning device) 37 having a pair of movable members 37b, 37b for converting the ball into a state in which it is easy to flow in and having a second starting prize opening therein is provided. Has been.

  The pair of opening / closing members 37b, 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 always holds a closed state (a disadvantageous state for a player: a non-inductive state) with an interval of about the diameter of the game ball. However, since the start winning port 36 is provided above the normal variation winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state.

  Then, when the result of the normal variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, it is opened in a reverse “C” shape by a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 4) as a drive device, and a normal variation prize is won. The device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player: a guiding state) in which a game ball can flow. In other words, the normal variation winning device 37 is a starting winning device that can be converted into a guiding state in which the game ball flowing down the gaming area is guided to the starting winning region and a non-inducing state that is not guiding.

  Further, below the normal variation winning device 37, a special variation winning device (which can be converted into a state where the game ball is not accepted (first state) and a state where it is easy to accept (second state) depending on the result of the special figure variation display game ( A big prize opening, a special electric (special electric accessory), and a variable prize winning device 38 are arranged.

  The special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side, and depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The state is changed from a closed state (closed state unfavorable for the player: first state) to an open state (state advantageous to the player: second state). That is, the special variable winning device 38 is a variable winning device that can be converted into a first state in which a game ball cannot be won and a second state in which a game ball can be won.

  In other words, the special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c driven by a large winning port solenoid 38b (see FIG. 4) as a driving device. If the result of the variable display game is a special result), the player can easily flow the game ball into the big prize opening by converting from the first state where the big prize opening is closed to the second state opened. Is given a predetermined game value (prize ball).

In addition, a count switch 38a (see FIG. 4) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big prize opening is disposed inside the big prize opening (winning area).
Below the special variable winning device 38, there is provided an out port 39 for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port.

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (for example, on the top of the game board 30), a first special figure fluctuation display game, a second special figure fluctuation display game, and a normal figure start that form a special figure fluctuation display game (fluctuation display game). There is provided a collective display device 50 that executes a common figure variable display game triggered by winning a prize at the gate 34 in one place.

  As shown in FIG. 3A, the collective display device 50 includes a first special figure variation display unit (special figure) for a first special figure fluctuation display game configured by a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like. 1 display) 51, a second special figure fluctuation display part (special figure 2 display) 52 for the second special figure fluctuation display game, and a fluctuation display part (general figure display) 53 for the common figure fluctuation display game; In addition, storage display units 54 to 56 for informing the start memory number of each variable display game, which are also constituted by LED lamps, are provided. Further, the collective display device 50 is turned on when a big hit occurs and a first gaming state display unit (first gaming state indicator) 57 that notifies the occurrence of the big hit, and lights up when a short time state occurs to notify the occurrence of a short time state. A second game state display unit (second game state display) 60, an error display unit (third game state display unit) that displays an error in which the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on 58) A round display section 59 for displaying the number of rounds at the time of big hit (the number of opening / closing of the special variable winning device 38) is provided.

  The special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the fluctuation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. When the result of the game is “out of”, for example, the central segment is turned on as a result mode of out of game, and when the result of the game is “win”, the result of out of game (special result mode) is not. A game result is displayed with a result mode other than the result mode (for example, a number such as “3” or “7”) turned on.

  The normal display 53 blinks the lamp during the change and displays that the change is in progress. When the game result is “out of”, for example, the lamp is turned off, and when the game result is “hit”, the lamp is turned on to display the game result.

  The special figure 1 holding display 54 displays the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) among the number of winning balls of the game balls to the start winning opening 36 which is the variation start condition of the special figure 1 display 51. To do. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3B, when the number of holdings is “0”, all four lamps are turned off, and when the number of holdings is “1”, only lamp 1 is turned on. Further, when the number of holdings is “2”, the lamps 1 and 2 are turned on, when the number of holdings is “3”, the lamps 1, 2 and 3 are turned on, and when the number of holdings is “4”, 4 is set. All the lamps 1 to 4 are turned on.

  The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 displays the start memory number (= hold number) of the second start winning opening (ordinary variable prize device 37), which is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 indicator 52, and the special figure 1 hold indicator. It is displayed in the same manner as 54 (see FIG. 3B).

  As shown in FIG. 3 (c), the universal map hold display 56 displays the start memory number (= hold count) of the universal map start gate 34 which is the variation start condition of the general map display 53. For example, when the hold number is “0”, the lamps 1 and 2 are turned off, and when the hold number is “1”, only the lamp 1 is turned on. When the number of hold is “2”, lamps 1 and 2 are turned on. When the number of hold is “3”, lamp 1 is blinked, lamp 2 is turned on, and when the number of hold is “4”. Lamps 1 and 2 are blinked.

For example, the first game state indicator 57 turns off the lamp in a normal gaming state, and turns on the lamp when a big hit has occurred.
For example, the second gaming state indicator 60 turns off the lamp in the normal gaming state, and turns on the lamp when the time-short state occurs.
For example, when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the third gaming state indicator 58 turns off the lamp when the jackpot probability state is low, and the jackpot probability state is high probability when the gaming machine 10 is turned on. In case of, turn on the lamp.

  For example, the round display unit 59 turns off the lamp in the normal gaming state, and turns on the lamp corresponding to the number of rounds (2 rounds or 15 rounds) when the big hit occurs. The round display unit 59 may be configured by a 7 segment type display.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various locations in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The winning prize opening 36, the normal variable prize winning device 37 or the special variable prize winning device 38 is won, or it flows into the out port 39 provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area. When a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the start winning opening 36, the normal variation winning apparatus 37, or the special variable winning apparatus 38, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning opening is awarded by the payout control apparatus 200. It is discharged from the controlled dispensing unit to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the front frame 12.

  On the other hand, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 4) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided in the general diagram start gate 34. When a game ball that has been driven into the area 32 passes through the usual figure start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and a usual figure change display game is played.

  In addition, the normal variation display game cannot be started, for example, the normal variation display game has already been played and the normal variation display game has not been completed, When 37 is converted to the open state and the game ball passes through the general figure start gate 34, if it is less than the upper limit of the normal figure start memory number, the general figure start memory number is added (+1) and the general figure start memory number is increased. One figure start memory is stored. The number of memorized start prizes is displayed on the memory display unit 56 for notifying the number of start prizes of the collective display device 50.

  In addition, in the normal chart start memory, a random number value for hit determination for determining a hit error of the normal figure fluctuation display game is stored, and when the random number value for hit determination coincides with the determination value In addition, a specific result mode (specific result) is derived by hitting the common map fluctuation display game.

  The usual map change display game is executed by a change display unit (common figure display) 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The general-purpose indicator 53 is composed of LEDs indicating normal identification information (general-purpose symbols, normal symbols) when the LED is lit, and indicating misalignment when the LED is not lit. Information variation is displayed, and after a predetermined variation display time has elapsed, the LED is turned on or off to display the result.

  Note that, for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, and the like may be used as the normal identification information, and these may be displayed by variably displaying for a predetermined time and then stopped. If the stop display of the normal variation display game is a specific result, the pair of movable members 37b and 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 is released for a predetermined time (for example, 0.6 seconds). Open. This makes it easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening inside the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the number of times the second special figure changing display game is executed increases.

  When the value of the random number extracted at the time of detecting the passage to the general map start gate 34 is a winning value, the normal symbol displayed on the general map display 53 stops in the hit state (stop display of the normal map variable display game) Becomes a specific result) and hits. At this time, in the normal variation winning device 37, the movable member 37b, 37b is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.6 seconds) by driving a built-in power solenoid 37c (see FIG. 4). It is converted to an open state, and a winning game ball is allowed.

  The winning ball to the starting winning port 36 and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a provided inside, respectively. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected as the start winning ball of the first special figure variable display game, is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4), and is awarded to the normal variable winning device 37. The played game balls are detected as start winning balls for the second special figure variation display game, and stored with a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) as a limit.

  Further, at the time of detection of the starting winning ball, values are respectively extracted from the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and each variation pattern random number, and the extracted random number value is stored in a special figure storage area in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 4). (Part of the RAM) is stored as a special figure start memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times). The number stored in the special figure start memory is displayed on the storage display units 54 and 55 for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50 and also on the display device 41 of the center case 40.

  The game control device 100 receives a special figure display (variation) based on a prize (special figure 1 prize) to the start prize opening 36 or a prize (special figure 2 prize) to the normal variable prize prize device 37, or their start memory. Display device) 51 or 52 plays the first or second special figure variation display game. That is, the game control device 100 is a game execution control unit that can control the execution of the variable display game.

  The first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are performed by variably displaying a special symbol (special figure) as a plurality of identification information and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result form. In addition, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game for displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) corresponding to each special figure fluctuation display game on the display device 41 is executed. ing.

  In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, for example, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-described numbers is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol). The variation display is started in the order of symbols), the symbols that have been varied after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped, and the result of the special symbol variation display game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 performs a variable display game with a decorative special symbol corresponding to the number of special figure starting memories, and various effect displays such as the appearance of a character are performed to improve interest.

  If the display form of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result form as a result of the special figure variation display game, a special game state ( This is a so-called big hit (small hit) state. Correspondingly, as a result of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game, the display mode of the display device 41 is a special result mode (for example, a big hit mode such as “5, 5, 5”, “1, 3, 5”, etc. In the case of a small hit mode), a big hit or a small hit is made, and a first special gaming state (so-called big hit state) or a second special gaming state (small hit state) is set.

  The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display is performed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 may use different display devices and different display areas in the first special map variable display game and the second special map variable display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

  Further, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when there is a start memory of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the special figure fluctuation display game can be executed, the second special figure fluctuation display game is Priority is given to execution.

  In addition, in the state where the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started and the number of start memories is zero, the start winning opening 36 (or the normal variable prize winning device 37) is provided. When the game ball wins, the start memory is stored as the start right is generated, the start memory number is incremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure) is immediately added based on the start memory. (Variable display game) is started, and at this time, the start memory number is decremented by one.

  On the other hand, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) cannot be started immediately, for example, the first or second special figure fluctuation display game has already been performed, and the special figure fluctuation display game has ended. If the game ball is won at the start winning opening 36 (or the normal variable prize winning device 37) in a state that is not in a special state or in a special game state, the start memory number is 1 if the start memory number is less than the upper limit number. By adding, one start memory is stored. Then, in a state where the starting memory number is 1 or more, a state where the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure fluctuation display game or the special game state) (End), the start memory number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) is started based on the stored start memory.

  In the following description, when the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the general winning port switches 35a to 35n, the count The switch 38a is a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a magnetic detection coil and detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. Has been. A micro switch having a mechanical contact is used for the front frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or the game frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 or the like. be able to.

FIG. 4 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. The CPU unit 110 includes an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

  The CPU section 110 receives signals (starting winning detection signals) from a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and a proximity switch interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 in the input section 120. An inversion circuit 112 composed of an inverter or the like that is logically inverted and input to the gaming microcomputer 111 and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator are provided to generate a clock for a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 is included. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the internal RAM of gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit and an initialization switch to inform gaming control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of power failure A control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal is provided.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing, it can remove from the object of replacement | exchange and can aim at cost reduction.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  The initialization switch signal is a signal generated when the initialization switch is turned on, and forcibly initializes information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. . Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 constitutes a control means for comprehensively controlling the game. Specifically, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B, and a RAM (Random Access Memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed. Prepare.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information for game control (programs, fixed data, determination values for comparison with various random numbers, etc.) in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores the work area and various signals of the CPU 111A during game control. Used as a storage area for values extracted from random numbers (various random values). As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory) may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the production contents, and the presence or absence of the reach state.

  The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a loss fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a big hit fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is per 15R or 2R, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a second half variation pattern table and a first half variation pattern table.

  Reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can change, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state refers to a display mode that does not deviate from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device has reached the stage before the display result is derived and displayed as the variable display control of the display device proceeds. . For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two variable display areas of the left, middle, and right (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  This reach state includes a plurality of reach productions, and the possibility that a special result mode is derived (different reliability) includes normal reach, special 1 reach, special 2 reach, special 3 reach, Premier reach etc. are set. The reliability increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game. Therefore, it can be said that the state in which the reach state occurs is a state that has a higher possibility of being a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  Here, the CPU 111A serves as a reach state generating means capable of generating a reach state in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory stored in the RAM 111C as the start memory means.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device and outputs it. Thus, the entire gaming machine 10 is controlled.

  Although not shown, the game microcomputer 111 is a jackpot determining random number for the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various reach and reach). A random number generation circuit for generating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation display game in a variation display with no change), a random number for determining a hit of a normal variation display game, and the like from the oscillation circuit 113 Based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal), a clock generator is provided that generates a timer interrupt signal for a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives the update timing of the random number generation circuit.

  In addition, the CPU 111A stores a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) and a special figure routine process (step A7) in a special figure game process (see FIG. 12) described later. One of the variation pattern tables is acquired from the inside. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (winning (big hit, small hit) or out of game) of the special figure fluctuation display game, or the probability state (normal probability state (low probability) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state. State) or high-probability state), the variation state based on the operation state (normal operation state, short-time operation state or winning ease state to be described later) of the normal variation winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the starting memory number, etc. One of the variation pattern tables is selected from the pattern tables and acquired.

  Although not shown, the payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. , Control for paying out a prize ball. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a start port 1 switch 36a in the start winning port 36, a start port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, a gate switch 34a in the usual start gate 34, and a general winning port. An interface which is connected to the switches 35a to 35n and the count switch 38a and receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches, and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. A chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided. Proximity I / F 121 seems to be floating because the input range is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the proximity switch is improperly shorted, the switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. An abnormal state can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

  All the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are supplied to the second input port 122 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140, and also supplied from the main board 100 to the test firing test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70. It is like that. In addition, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the inverting circuit 112 in addition to the second input port 122. It is configured. The inversion circuit 112 is provided because the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 is assumed to receive a signal from a microswitch or the like, and is detected as a negative logic, that is, a low level (0 V) as an effective level. Because it is designed to do.

  Therefore, when a micro switch is used as the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, the detection signal can be directly input to the gaming microcomputer 111 without providing the inverting circuit 112. That is, when it is desired to directly input negative logic signals from the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the gaming microcomputer 111, the proximity switch cannot be used. As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

  Further, the input unit 120 includes a start winning opening 36 converted by signals from the fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 and the vibration sensor switch 62 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 and the proximity I / F 121. The start port 1 switch 36a in the inside, the start port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the general winning port switches 35a to 35n, and the signals from the count switch 38a are taken in via the data bus 140. A second input port 122 for supplying to the microcomputer 111 is provided. The data held by the second input port 122 is read by asserting the enable signal CE1 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 122. be able to. The same applies to other ports described later.

  Further, the input unit 120 receives signals and payouts from the front frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the game frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 and the like. A status signal indicating a payout abnormality from the control device 200, a shot ball break switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow switch signal indicating overflow are fetched and supplied to the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. One input port 123 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full).

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt trigger circuit 124 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. The circuit 124 has a function of removing noise from these input signals. Of the signals from the power supply device 400, the power failure monitoring signal and the initialization switch signal are once inputted to the first input port 123 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt trigger circuit 124 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122 and 123 of the input unit 120. Data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and outputs a 4-bit data signal output to the payout control device 200, a control signal (data strobe signal) indicating validity / invalidity of the data, and a data strobe signal SSTB output to the effect control device 300. 1 and a second output port 132 for generating an 8-bit data signal to be output to the effect control device 300. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300 by parallel communication. In addition, the data strobe signal from the first output port 131 is provided to the output unit 130 so that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300, that is, to ensure one-way communication. A unidirectional buffer 133 that outputs an 8-bit data signal from the SSTB and the second output port 132 is provided. A buffer may be provided for a signal output from the first output port 131 to the payout control device 200.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization connected to the data bus 140 and a signal indicating the probability status of the jackpot via the relay board 70. The output buffer 134 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 134 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in the game store. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch, that is not required to be processed is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 134.

  On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test fire testing device as they are, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the vibration sensor switch 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that game control is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test test apparatus via the buffer 134 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 134 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (a large prize opening solenoid) 38b that is connected to the data bus 140 and opens and closes the special variation winning device 38, and a solenoid (a general electric solenoid) that opens and closes the movable members 37b and 37b of the normal variation winning device 37. ) According to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, the third output port 135 for outputting the open / close data of 37c and the on / off data of the digit line connected to the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 50 A fourth output port 136 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected, and a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71 Is provided. Information relating to the gaming machine 10 output from the external information terminal 71 is supplied to, for example, an information collection terminal installed in a game store or a game hall internal management device (not shown).

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signal of the big prize opening solenoid 38b output from the third output port 135 to generate a solenoid driving signal, or receives the opening / closing data signal of the main solenoid 37c to drive the solenoid. A first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates and outputs a signal, and a second driver that outputs an on / off drive signal for a digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135 138b, a third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136, and a fifth output port 137 that supplies the external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the third driver 138c that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the second driver 138b for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V. A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs 12 V, and drawing the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 134, the third output port 135, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of bidirectional communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 through serial communication. Note that such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general general-purpose microprocessor, and therefore, ports such as the input ports 122 and 123 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 formed of an amusement chip (IC), as with the game microcomputer 111, and a video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 that performs video control exclusively under the control of the 1st CPU 311 , VDP (Video Display Processor) 313 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the 2nd CPU 312 and various melody and sound effects are reproduced from the speakers 19a and 19b. The sound source LSI 314 for controlling the sound output is provided.

  The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 are connected to program ROMs 321 and 322 each composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by each CPU. Is connected to an image ROM 323 storing character images and video data, and a sound ROM 324 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the presentation, instructs the video control microcomputer 312 to indicate the contents of the output video, and instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound. Then, processing such as lighting of the decoration lamp, motor drive control, and production time management is executed. RAMs that provide work areas for the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 are provided in the respective chips. Note that the RAM that provides the work area may be provided outside the chip.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 and the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are serially connected. Data transmission / reception is performed, and data transmission / reception is performed in parallel with the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 and between the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the VDP 313. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial. The VDP 313 includes an ultra-high-speed VRAM (Video Random Access Memory) 313a that is used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 323, and an image that is enlarged or reduced. A scaler 313b for processing, a signal conversion circuit 313c for generating a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method, and the like are provided.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC is input from the VDP 313 to the main control microcomputer 311 in order to synchronize the video of the display device 41 and lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the front frame 12 and the game board 30. Further, from the VDP 313 to the video control microcomputer 312, an interrupt signal INT0-n and a command or data reception waiting state from the video control microcomputer 312 are notified to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM 313 a. A wait signal WAIT is input. Further, the video control microcomputer 312 receives from the main control microcomputer 311 a synchronization signal SYNC that informs that the video control microcomputer 312 is operating normally and gives command transmission timing. A call signal CTS and a response signal RTS are exchanged between the main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 in order to transmit and receive commands and data in the handshake method.

  Note that the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 uses a CPU that is faster than the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311, that is, an expensive CPU. By providing a video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 separately from the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and sharing the processing, it is possible to display a fast moving image on a large screen that is difficult to achieve with the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 alone. It is possible to display the image on the display device 41, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost as compared with the case where two CPUs having the same processing capability as the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 are used. Also, by providing two CPUs, it becomes possible to separately develop the control programs for the two CPUs in parallel, thereby shortening the development period of the new model.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. A variation start command, a customer waiting demo command, a fanfare command, a probability information command, an error designation command, and the like transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via the command I / F 331 are used as an effect control command signal. Receive. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. Is provided.

  The effect control device 300 includes a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 42 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and the front frame 12. Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the like) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) and board effects provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect motor / SOL control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a device (for example, an electric accessory that enhances effect effects in cooperation with effect display on the display device 41), and a motor (for example, the moving device) provided on the front frame 12 A frame effect motor control circuit 335 for driving and controlling the light 45 is provided. Note that these control circuits 332 to 335 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 via an address / data bus 304.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an on / off state of a switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the front frame 12 and an effect motor switch for detecting the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44. Is detected, and a detection signal is input to the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311; an amplifier circuit 337a including an audio power amplifier for driving an upper speaker 19a provided on the front frame 12; An amplifier circuit 337b for driving the provided lower speaker 19b is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor and a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V for driving the display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, DC5V serving as a power supply voltage for the command I / F 331, DC18V for driving an LED and a speaker, and a standard for these DC voltages Or a voltage of NDC 24V used for turning on the power monitor lamp. Further, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 or the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312, DC 3. The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating 3V or DC 1.2V. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal RST generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 includes a main control microcomputer 311, a video control microcomputer 312, a VDP 313, a sound source LSI 314, control circuits 332 to 335 for driving and controlling lamps and motors, speakers, and the like. Are supplied to the amplifier circuits 337a and 337b, which are in a reset state. In this embodiment, a general-purpose port of the video control microcomputer 312 is used to generate and supply a reset signal to the VDP 313. Thereby, the cooperation of the operations of the video control microcomputer 312 and the VDP 313 can be improved.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
The CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided to the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111B. Compared with the determination value stored in the table, a process for determining whether or not the normal-variation display game is won or lost is performed. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the general symbol display 53, a processing for displaying a general symbol variation display game to be stopped is performed. When the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a win, a special result mode is displayed on the general map display 53, the general electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the opening / closing members 37b and 37b of the normal variable prize winning device 37 are set in advance. Time (for example, 0.6 seconds) is controlled to be released as described above. In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of order, control is performed on the general map display 53 to display the result form of the shift.

  Further, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on an input of a detection signal of a game ball from a starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning port 36, and based on this start memory, the first special figure variation display game is stored. The big hit determination random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining whether or not the first special figure variable display game is won or lost is performed.

  Furthermore, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on this start memory, for the big hit determination of the second special figure variable display game A random number value is extracted and compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining whether or not the second special figure variation display game is won or lost is performed.

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (production control command) including the determination results of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game to the production control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, a process for displaying a special figure fluctuation display game to be stopped is performed.

In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying the decoration special figure change display game corresponding to the special figure change display game.
Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed.

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 when the result of the special figure variation display game is a hit (special result), and A process for generating a special game state (first special game state or second special game state) corresponding to the special result is performed. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A performs control for allowing the game ball to flow into the special winning opening by, for example, opening the open / close door 38c of the special variable winning apparatus 38 by the special winning opening solenoid 38b. .

  Then, there is a condition that either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening or a predetermined time (for example, 25 seconds or 1.6 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big prize opening. Opening the grand prize opening until it is achieved is defined as one round (1R), and this is repeated (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 or 2 times, that is, 15R or 2R) (cycle game). Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  That is, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 serves as a game state control unit that can control the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 10.

  In addition, the game control apparatus 100 has a special figure variation display game (fluctuation display game) in the pachinko gaming machine 10 as a winning result (special result), and the gaming state is the first special gaming state (big hit) or the first special gaming state. A low probability state (normal probability state) that is a low probability and a normal probability that each special game state of the second special gaming state (small hit) that is given to the player lower than the gaming state is generated. It can be set as appropriate to one of the high probability states (probability variation states), which is a higher probability than the first special gaming state (big hit), and is given to the player rather than the first special gaming state. The probability state of the second special gaming state (small hit) having a low gaming value can be set independently. For example, the game control device 100 can generate a probability change state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The probability variation state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher (a special figure high probability state) than a normal probability state (a special figure low probability state).

  That is, the game control apparatus 100 can control a probability state in which a special gaming state occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 10 (a special variation display game has a special result) (that is, the probability state is a low probability state in which the probability state is low). It functions as a probability state control means (which can be set to (normal probability state) and a high probability state having a higher probability than the normal probability). It should be noted that the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation, regardless of whether the first special figure fluctuation display game or the second special figure fluctuation display game results in the special figure fluctuation display game. Both display games are in a probable state.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a short time state as a game state after the special game state is ended based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game.
In this time-short state, control is performed so that the normal-variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are in the time-short operation state. Specifically, in the short-time state, the execution time of the above-described usual-variable display game is controlled to be a second variable display time shorter than the first variable display time (for example, 10 seconds is 1 second). Thus, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be substantially increased. Further, in the short time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal variation display game being won, the opening time becomes the second opening time longer than the first opening time in the normal state ( It is controlled so as to be a so-called ordinary electric long open state (for example, 0.6 seconds is 5.8 seconds). In the short-time state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 is not the first opening number of one time but a plurality of times of two or more times (for example, (3 times) the second number of times of opening.

It is to be noted that the execution time of the normal variation display game is set to the second variation display time (for example, 1 second), and the release mode of the normal variation winning device 37 is the second opening time (for example, 5.8). In the control of (second), only one of them may be performed, or both may be performed. In the short-time operation state, control may be performed so that the probability of a hit result of the normal-variable display game is higher than that in the normal operation state.
Further, when the normally variable winning device 37 is opened during the second opening time, it is opened continuously, for example, for 5.8 seconds by one opening, but it is totaled over a plurality of times (for example, twice). Therefore, the second opening time (for example, 5.8 seconds) may be used.
As a result, the game ball can easily win the normal variation winning device 37, and the second special figure variation display game can be easily started.

  In addition, the time variation operation state of the probability variation state, the normal variation display game, and the normal variation prize winning device 37 can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated. Is possible.

  Here, the special result of the special figure variation display game in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is set with a plurality of types in which the execution state of the special game state and the additional game value given to the player after the special game state ends are different. The game control device 100 selects a special result based on the jackpot symbol random number. That is, it can be said that the execution mode of the special gaming state and the amount of additional game value are determined based on the jackpot symbol random number. In addition, the execution mode of the special game state in the gaming machine of the present embodiment is the number of rounds that can be executed and the opening time of the special winning opening. Further, the additional game value means that the game state is set to a high probability state until the next special result mode is derived after the special game state ends, or the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times after the special game state ends. It is to be in a short time state. Hereinafter, a state in which an additional game value is given after the special game state ends may be referred to as a specific game state.

  Specifically, as a special result of the special figure fluctuation display game, big hit and small hit are set as special results. The jackpot generates the first special gaming state. The number of rounds in the first special game state is 15 rounds or 2 rounds, and the opening time of the big prize opening in each round is a long opening time (25 seconds). Then, after the special gaming state ends, the special figure high probability state and the short time state until the next special result derivation, or after the special gaming state ends, the special figure high probability state and the short time state are entered. Or when the special game state ends, the special figure low probability state is reached and the time is reduced until 100 special figure variation display games are executed, or after the special game state ends, the special figure low probability state It may become a state without time shortening.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the above-mentioned small hit can be generated with a predetermined probability in the special figure 2 in the normal gaming state, and a predetermined probability other than the special figure 2 in the normal gaming state. It can be generated at a lower low probability (normal probability) (for details, see FIG. 6C described later). When a small hit occurs, a specific result is displayed and a small special game state (second special game state) is entered. In the small special game state, the number of rounds is 2 and the opening time of the big winning opening is a short opening time (1.8 seconds × 2 times or 3.6 seconds × 1 time). For this reason, it can be said that in the second special gaming state, the gaming value given to the player is lower than that in the first special gaming state in that the opening time of the big prize opening is a short opening time. Although the details of the probability state after the end of the small special gaming state and the operation state of the normal variation winning device 37 will be described later, it is roughly divided into a normal mode and a specific A reach frequent occurrence mode that are the same as the state before the small hit occurrence Four types of specific B reach frequent occurrence mode and specific C reach frequent occurrence mode can be set.

  Here, the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a special result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set. That the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery, for example. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having a meaning.

  Although not shown, both the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game can derive the above-mentioned special results for the big hit and the small hit. However, the selection rate (sorting) of these special results is set so as to be different between the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game. In this embodiment, the selection rate of the special result that is a small hit is higher in the second special figure fluctuation display game than in the first special figure fluctuation display game.

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not to shift from the normal figure low probability state to the normal figure high probability state based on the fact that the predetermined condition is established in the normal figure low probability state (normal game state). It is configured to be able to execute a lottery (hereinafter, “usually high probability transition lottery: detailed later”). For this reason, in addition to the case where a special special result (big hit) is obtained in the special figure variation display game, a win easy state in which the normal variable winning device 37 is opened when the lottery is won, which is similar to the short-time state. Will be. In addition, when a special result is obtained in the special map fluctuation display game, do not shift to a high probability of ordinary figure (do not set a special result that automatically generates a short-time state), and win the lottery of ordinary figure high probability transition. Only in such a case, it is possible to shift to the normal high probability state (to generate the winning easy state), or to set whether or not the automatic time reduction state is generated depending on the type of special result.

  That is, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the game control device 100 opens the normal variation winning device 37 as the start winning device for the first time (first opening time; for example, 0.6 seconds). The guidance state (opening) for a second time (second opening time; for example, 5.8 seconds) longer than the normal state (normal operation state) in which the state (guidance state for guiding the game ball to the start winning area) is set. It functions as a winning easy state generating means capable of generating a winning easy state (normal power support state = normal long open state).

  Here, the guidance state of the normal variation winning device 37 is that the pair of movable members 37b, 37b in the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state, and the game ball is put into the second start winning opening inside the normal variation winning device 37. Inducible state. In other words, in the normal game state, the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 is increased (extended) compared to the normal variation winning device 37 in the normal operation state, and a game ball is awarded to the normal variation winning device 37. In this state, it is easy to start the special figure variation display game.

  In other words, the game control device 100 generates a short time state as the gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game, and the first opening of the normal variation winning device 37 in the normal state. In addition to making it possible to set the operation state to be shorter when the second opening time is controlled to be longer than the time, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the normal variation winning device 37 is set to be higher than the normal state. By making it possible to generate an easy-to-win state that is in a guided state over a long second time, the chance of winning a game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 is increased.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment according to the present invention, the normal variation state is achieved, and the normal variation winning device 37 is moved to the winning facilitated state (movable member) by the game control device 100 (a winning winning state generating means). 37b, 37b is set to the open state), the result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 becomes a special result, and the second special game When a state (small hit game state) occurs, the CPU 111A (game state control means) of the game control device 100 can win a game ball when the small hit game state (second special game state) occurs. According to the winning state of the game ball to the special variable winning device 38 (variable winning device) converted into the two states, the game state (mode transition destination) after the end of the small hit gaming state is controlled. It is possible.

  Here, the winning mode of the game ball to the special variable winning device 38 is the number of winning game balls won to the special variable winning device 38, the winning timing, and the like. A specific area may be provided, and a passing mode of the game ball with respect to the specific area (for example, the number of times specified in a specified round) may be included.

  Hereinafter, in order to explain the details of the winning simplification state, it depends on the lottery probability of the normal variable display game in the case where the gaming state is the normal gaming state and the above-mentioned short time state, and the result of the lottery The operation mode (open mode) of the normal variation winning device 37 will be described using FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B for comparison.

  First, when the game state is the normal game state, as shown in FIG. 6 (a), the probability of being a hit result in the above-mentioned usual figure variation display game (ordinary figure lottery probability) is low (for example, 1/150). ). Then, when the normal variation display game is a hit result and the normal variation winning device 37 is released, as shown in FIG. 6B, the release time is set to the first time (for example, at a rate of 8/10). 0.6 second), and the opening time is set to the second time (for example, 5.8 seconds) at a ratio of 2/10.

That is, in the normal gaming state, when the normal variation display game is a hit result with a probability of 1/150, the normal variation winning device 37 is released over the second time described above at a rate of 2/10. The winning facilitated state (general power support state) will occur.
Thereby, even in the normal game state, it becomes easy for the game ball to win the normal variation winning device 37, and the start of the second special figure variation display game can be facilitated.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is the above-mentioned short-time state (the normal variation winning device 37 is in the short-time operation state), as shown in FIG. 149/150). Then, when the normal variation display game is a hit result and the normal variation winning device 37 is released, as shown in FIG. 6B, the release time is set to the second time (for example, 10/10). 5.8 seconds). In other words, in the short-time state, if the winning result is the normal map variation display game, the normal variation winning device 37 is always opened for the second time. Easy to start.

  Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, a special variation display game (decorative symbol variation display game) based on the winning of a game ball to the start winning opening 36 (Special Figure 1) or the normal variation winning device 37 (Special Figure 2). The result is a special result that generates the above-described second special gaming state (small hit state), and the display on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 displays the special result (small hit (second special gaming state). )) Is set to 1/300 on the special figure 1 display 51 (start winning opening 36) side, as shown in FIG. 6 (c). The special figure 2 display 52 side is set to 299/300.

  That is, in the normal gaming state, the setting of the special figure 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) is overwhelmingly higher in the probability of winning a small game than the special figure 1 (start winning prize port 36) (in other words, the special figure). In FIG. 2, small hits occur frequently), and special figure 2 is difficult to win, so the small hit probability is set higher than special figure 1.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is the short-time state (the normal variation winning device 37 is in the short-time operation state), the small hit probability is set to 1/300 for both the special figures 1 and 2. That is, in the short-time state, since it is in the above-mentioned normal power support state, it is easy to win special figure 2, so the small hit probability for winning the small hit is set to a low probability.

Although not shown in the drawings, in the present embodiment, the breakdown of the result mode of the special variation display game in the winning to the normal variation winning device 37 (special figure 2) in the normal gaming state has a probability of 1/300 of the big hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 6C, the probability of being a small hit is set to 299/300, and all but the big hit are set to be a small hit.
In this way, the determination is made using the same random number, but different random numbers may be used for the big hit determination and the small hit determination.

  Accordingly, in the normal gaming state, when the normal figure change display game is a hit result at a ratio of 1/150, the special change display game by winning the normal change winning device 37 (special figure 2) based on the hit result is shown. As a result, if it is not a big win, a small win always occurs and the special variable prize winning device 38 (big prize opening) is opened.

  At this time, in the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 6 (d), in the lottery of the opening mode of the special variable winning device 38 (big winning port) due to the occurrence of a small hit, two opening / closing operations (opening mode A: For example, the selection ratio of 2 times 1.8 second opening is set at a ratio of 2/10, which is much lower than the setting in the short-time state (ratio of 9/10), and one opening / closing operation (Open mode B: For example, 3.6 seconds is opened once) The selection ratio is set at a ratio of 8/10, and is selected more than the setting in the time-saving state (1/10 ratio). It is a specification.

  For this reason, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the normal variation display game is a hit result with a probability of 1/150, and the normal variation winning device 37 is set to the second time (for example, 5.2. 8 seconds), when the winning easy state is reached, a small hit gaming state (second special gaming state) is always generated if a big win is not won due to winning in the normally variable winning device 37 (see Fig. 2). The opening mode of the special variable winning device 38 (big winning opening) according to the small hit gaming state is selected to open once (opening mode B) with a high probability. Then, the CPU 111A (game state control means) of the game control device 100 sets the game ball winning mode (for example, the number of game balls) (the number of game balls) to the special variation winning device 38 being opened by the opening mode B. The game state (mode transition destination) after the end of the small hit gaming state (second special gaming state) is determined according to the number of winnings), and control is performed in the determined gaming state.

  It should be noted that the probability of winning a small hit as a result mode of the special variation display game in the winning to the normal variation winning device 37 (special figure 2) is more easily achieved than when the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal state. It is set to be higher at a certain time (in other words, the second special gaming state is generated with a higher probability when the normal variation winning device 37 is in the winning easier state than in the normal state). It may be.

  That is, when the gaming state is controlled as the normal gaming state by the CPU 111A as the gaming state control means, the gaming control device 100 as the winning easy state generating means generates the winning easy state with a predetermined probability, The game control device 100 as the game execution control means is used for winning a game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 (starting winning device) in which the winning easy state is generated by the winning easy state generating means (game control device 100). In the variation display game based on the special variation display game, the small win game state (the first game state) with a higher probability than the special variation display game based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variation prize-winning device 37 in the normal state where the winning easy state is not generated. 2 special gaming state) is generated, and when the second special gaming state is generated by the game execution control means, the CPU 111A When the special game state occurs, the game state after the end of the second special game state can be controlled according to the number of game balls won in the special variable winning device 38 (large winning port) converted to the second state. It is good.

  As the mode transition destination set as the gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state, when the number of game balls won in the special variable winning device 38 is used as the winning mode of the gaming ball to the special variable winning device 38 As shown in FIG. 6 (e), when the number of winnings is 0, “no change” is the same as before the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, and when the number of winnings is 1 to 3, a specific reach state is normal. "Specific A reach frequent occurrence mode" as a specific gaming state that occurs at a higher probability than the gaming state, if the number of winnings is 4-5, "specific B reach frequent occurrence mode" as the specific gaming state, 6 winnings In the above case, it is set to shift to the “specific C reach frequent occurrence mode” as the specific gaming state.

  In the “specific A reach frequent occurrence mode”, the deviation variation pattern selection table 2-A shown in FIG. 7A, and in the “specific B reach frequent occurrence mode”, the deviation variation pattern selection table 2-B shown in FIG. In the “specific C reach frequent occurrence mode”, the deviation variation pattern selection table 2-C shown in FIG. 7C is selected. In the “specific A reach frequent occurrence mode”, as can be seen from the deviation variation pattern selection table 2-A, the selection rate of the reach of the group A is set to 7/10, It is higher than 1/10 in Group C. In the “specific B reach frequent occurrence mode”, as can be seen from the deviation variation pattern selection table 2-B, the selection rate of the reach of the group B is set to 7/10, Compared to 2/10 in Group C. In the “specific C reach frequent occurrence mode”, as can be seen from the deviation variation pattern selection table 2-C, the selection rate of the reach of the group C is set to 7/10, It is higher than 1/10 in Group B. In short, the effect mode (gaming state) after the end of the small hit gaming state is changed according to the winning mode to the special variable winning device 38 that is open in the small hit gaming state (second special gaming state) (however, Depending on the winning mode, there may be no change).

  That is, the CPU 111A (game state control means) of the game control device 100 has a plurality of special game states in which a specific reach state occurs with a higher probability than the normal game state as controllable game states, and the second special game The gaming state after the end of the second special gaming state based on the number of winning game balls to the special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening) converted to the second state upon occurrence of the state (small hit gaming state) It is possible to control which specific gaming state of a plurality of special gaming states is set.

  At this time, as an effect display on the display unit 41a of the display device 41, when the mode transition destination is the normal mode (normal game state), as shown in FIG. There is no effect image displayed in addition to the image (hereinafter referred to as a normal screen for convenience). Further, when the mode transition destination is the specific A reach frequent occurrence mode, as shown in FIG. 8B, in addition to the normal image (not shown), for example, an effect image FA that reproduces a state where the flame is burning is displayed. By additionally displaying as a background below the part 41a, it indicates that the reach (specific in this case, group A) reach selection rate is high in the transfer destination mode.

  In addition, when the mode transition destination is the specific B reach frequent occurrence mode, as shown in FIG. 8C, in addition to the normal image (not shown), for example, an effect image FA that reproduces a state where the flame is burning is displayed. The additional display as a background at the approximate center of the part 41a indicates that the reach selection rate of a specific (in this case, group B) is high in the transition mode. Further, when the mode transition destination is the specific C reach frequent occurrence mode, as shown in FIG. 8D, in addition to the normal image (not shown), for example, an effect image FA that reproduces a state where the flame is burning is displayed. By additionally displaying as a background above the portion 41a, the reach selection rate of a specific (in this case, group C) is high in the transfer destination mode.

  In other words, by displaying the effect image FA corresponding to the mode transition destination as a background on the normal image displayed on the display unit 41a in the display device 41, the player after the end of the small hit gaming state during the small hit gaming state. The transfer destination mode can be visually confirmed.

  In the gaming machine 10, the normal variation winning device 37 in the normal gaming state is set to the winning easy state by the game control device 100 as the above-described winning easy state generating means, and in the released state, the normal variation is performed. It is also conceivable that a plurality of results that result in a small hit (second special game state) are generated in the special variation display game based on winning in the winning device 37 (a plurality of special figure 2 holds are generated). In this case, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 causes the total winning of the game balls to the special variable winning device 38 (large winning port) converted to the second state each time the plurality of small hit gaming states are generated. Count information (cumulative number of winnings), and select the specific gaming state among the above-mentioned special gaming states as the gaming state (mode transfer destination) after the small hit according to the cumulative winning number You may make it do. In this case, the result of counting the cumulative number of winnings at this time may be displayed and an effect of reaching the transition destination mode as a level meter may be used.

  In other words, the CPU 111A as the game state control means controls the game state as the normal game state, and the normal variation winning device in which the winning easy state is generated by the winning easy state generating means (game control device 100). When a plurality of second special gaming states (small hits) are generated by a special variation display game based on winning of a game ball to 37 (start winning device), the second state is entered upon occurrence of the plurality of second special gaming states. Based on the accumulated number of winning game balls to the converted special prize winning device 38 (large winning opening), the gaming state after the end of the plurality of second special gaming states is determined as any of the plurality of special gaming states. It may be possible to control whether the specific gaming state is set.

  At this time, it is not the cumulative number of game balls awarded to the special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening) converted to the second state, but the game ball to the special variable winning device 38 converted to the second state each time. Based on the number of winnings (each time, the number of winnings), a specific gaming state to be controlled after a small hit may be selected. In other words, winning is awarded so that the difficulty increases as the mode is matched for each small hit that occurs multiple times, and the transition destination becomes an advantageous gaming state for the player (the probability of reaching the reach state becomes high). (For example, if the number of holds is 3, hold 1: 1 or more to shift to the specific A reach frequent occurrence mode with a win, hold 2: shift to specific B reach frequent occurrence mode with 3 or more wins, hold 3: Shift to specific C reach frequent occurrence mode with 5 or more winnings, etc.).

  That is, the CPU 111A as the game state control means controls the game state as the normal game state, and the normally variable winning device in which the winning easy state is generated by the winning easy state generating means (game control device 100). When a plurality of second special game states (small hits) are generated by a special variation display game based on winning of a game ball to 37 (start winning device), each time the plurality of second special game states are generated, Based on the number of game balls won in the special variable winning device 38 (big prize opening) converted into two states, the game state after the end of the plurality of second special game states is determined from among the plurality of special game states. It may be possible to control which of these special gaming states is set.

  Further, the gaming state after the end of the last small hit among the plurality of small hits based on the cumulative number of winning game balls to the special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening) converted to the second state May be controlled as to which specific gaming state of a plurality of special gaming states.

  In other words, the CPU 111A as the game state control means controls the game state as the normal game state, and the normal variation winning device in which the winning easy state is generated by the winning easy state generating means (game control device 100). When a plurality of second special gaming states (small hits) are generated by a special variation display game based on winning of a game ball to 37 (start winning device), the second state is entered upon occurrence of the plurality of second special gaming states. Based on the cumulative number of winning game balls to the converted special prize winning device 38 (large winning opening), the gaming state after the end of the last second special gaming state among the plurality of second special gaming states generated It may be possible to control which one of a plurality of special game states is set as a special game state.

Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment allows the special game when the result of the special figure variation display game is a special result (15R probability variation B, 15R normal B, 2R probability variation, small hit) that does not generate a short-time state. After completion of the state, a latent state that does not notify the probability state is generated. Hereinafter, the latent state based on 15R probability variation B is referred to as “latent state A”, the one based on 15R normal B is referred to as “latent state B”, and the one based on 2R probability variation is referred to as “latent state C”.
In addition, when the 2R probability change again in the latent state C due to the 2R probability change, the game control device 100 ends the latent state and notifies the high probability state.

  Although not shown, both the first special map variation display game and the second special map variation display game can derive the above-described six types of special results. However, the selection rate (sorting) of these special results is set so as to be different between the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game. In the present embodiment, the second special figure variation display game has a higher selection rate of special results that can give more additional game value such as 15R probability variation A than the first special figure variation display game. In other words, the second special figure variation display game is more advantageous to the player than the first special figure variation display game.

In addition, the game control apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment, based on the fact that the predetermined condition is established in the normal figure low probability state, determines whether to shift from the normal figure low probability state to the usual figure high probability state (hereinafter referred to as the universal figure). Figure high probability transfer lottery: details will be described later). For this reason, in addition to the case where a specific special result (15R probability variation A, 15R normal A) is obtained in the special figure fluctuation display game, if the lottery is won, a short-time state will occur.
In addition, when a special result is obtained in the special map fluctuation display game, do not shift to a high probability of ordinary figure (do not set a special result that automatically generates a short-time state), and win a lottery of the usual figure high probability transition lottery Only in such a case, it may be possible to shift to the normal high probability state.

Next, control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control apparatus 100 will be described.
The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a main process (mainly see FIGS. 9 and 10) that is a main routine that is repeated as a loop process, and a timer that is executed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms) as an interrupt routine for the main process. And interrupt processing (see FIG. 11).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described.
The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 9, first, an interrupt prohibition process (step S1) is performed, and then an interrupt vector setting process (step S1) for setting a jump destination vector address to be executed when an interrupt occurs. S2), a stack pointer setting process (step S3) for setting a stack pointer that is the start address of an area in which a value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt occurs, and an interrupt mode setting process (step S4) for setting an interrupt processing mode. )I do.

  Next, in order to wait for the program of the payout control apparatus (payout board) 200 to start up normally, for example, a time of 4 msec is waited (step S5). As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 rises first and sends the command to the payout control device 200 before the payout control device 200 starts up, thereby avoiding the payout control device 200 from losing the command. be able to. Thereafter, access to a readable / writable RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or an EEPROM is permitted (step S6), and off-data for making no output in all output ports is output (step S7). Further, a serial port (a port that is preinstalled in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is not used in this embodiment because it performs parallel communication with the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) is set to a state in which it is not used. Processing is performed (step S8).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the initialization switch in the power supply apparatus 400 is ON (step S9). Here, if it is determined that the initialization switch is OFF (step S9; No), in step S10, the data value of the power failure inspection region 1 is checked among the power failure inspection regions provided in the RWM (step S10). ), It is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (step S11). If it is determined in step S11 that the value of the power outage inspection area 1 is normal power outage inspection area check data 1 (step S11; Yes), the value of the data in the power outage inspection area 2 is checked (step S12), It is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (step S13). If it is determined in step S13 that the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal power interruption inspection area check data 2 (step S13; Yes), a process of calculating data called a checksum (step S14) is performed. The calculated checksum is compared with the checksum when the power is turned off (step S15), and it is determined whether or not the values match (step S16).

  If it is determined in step S9 that the initialization switch is ON (step S9; Yes), if it is determined in step S11 that the value of the power failure inspection area 1 is not normal (step S11; No), the power failure inspection area is determined in step S13. If it is determined that the value of 2 is not normal (step S13; No), or if it is determined in step S16 that the checksums do not match (step S16; No), the process jumps to step S24 in FIG.

  If it is determined in step S16 that the checksums match (step S16; Yes), the process proceeds to step S17 in FIG. 10 to clear all power failure inspection areas (step S17). After performing the clearing process (step S18), the area related to the error or fraud monitoring is reset (step S19). Next, an area for storing the gaming state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state (step S20). If it is determined that the probability is not high (step S20; No), steps S21 and S22 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S23.

  If it is determined in step S20 that there is a high probability (step S20; Yes), the ON information is saved in the high-probability notification flag area (step S21), and then the high information provided in the collective display device 50, for example. The ON data for turning on (lighting) the probability notification LED (error indicator) is saved in the area (fourth output port 136) corresponding to the segment (step S22), and the process proceeds to step S23. In step S23, a power failure recovery command corresponding to the special figure game process number is transmitted, and the process proceeds to step S29.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step S9, S11, S13, S16 to step S24, first, the process of clearing all work areas before the access prohibited area in the RAM used by the CPU 111A (step S24), the access prohibited area After the process of clearing all the stack areas later (step S25), the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step S26). Then, a time value for outputting the external information related to clearing the RWM is set (step S27), a process of transmitting a power-on command to the effect control device 300 (step S28) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S29. move on.

In step S29, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed.
The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the crystal oscillator 113, a timer interrupt signal and a random number having a predetermined period (for example, 4 ms) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S29, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S30). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Then, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are changed to various initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining the big hit symbol (big hit symbol random number 1, big hit symbol random number 2) After saving the initial value (start value) of a random number for determining the hit of the usual figure (start value) in a predetermined area of the RWM (step S31), the interruption is permitted (step S32). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, the initial value of various initial value random numbers generated on the CPU side. By setting (start value), it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S33) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers. In the present embodiment, although not particularly limited, the big hit random number is configured to be generated using a random number generated in a random number generation circuit. That is, the big hit random number is a hard random number generated by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the variation pattern random number are soft random numbers generated by software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step S33, the number of times that the power failure monitoring signal is checked is set (step S34). Then, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus, and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S35). If it is determined in step S35 that the power failure monitoring signal is not ON (step S35; No), the process returns to step S33, and the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S33) (step S32), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the timer interrupt Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  Note that the initial value random number update process in step S33 includes a method of performing an initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of value random number update processing, when performing initial value random number update processing in the main processing, it is necessary to disable interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed in the main process and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that it is simplified.

  If it is determined in step S35 that the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S35; Yes), it is determined whether or not ON is continued for the set number of checks (step S36). And when it determines with not having been continued (step S36; No), it returns to step S35 and repeats determination (loop process) of whether the power failure generate | occur | produced. If it is determined in step S36 that the operation has been continued (step S36; Yes), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S37), all output ports are turned OFF. A process of outputting data (step S38) is performed. Thereafter, a process for saving the power failure recovery inspection area check data 1 in the power failure recovery inspection area 1 (step S39), a process for saving the power failure recovery inspection area check data 2 in the power failure recovery inspection area 2 (step S40), and the power supply of the RWM After the process of calculating the checksum at the time of blocking (step S41), the calculated checksum is saved in the checksum area (step S42), and the process of prohibiting access to the RWM (step S43) is performed. And wait for the power to the gaming machine to be cut off. Thus, by saving the check data in the power failure recovery inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power interruption, the information stored in the RWM before the power interruption of the gaming machine 10 due to the power failure or the like is correct. Whether or not the game machine 10 is backed up can be determined when the gaming machine 10 is turned on again.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 11, the timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111A, the timer interrupt process of FIG. 11 is started.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, a register saving process (step S51) is performed in which a value held in a predetermined register is first transferred to the RWM. In the Z80 microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment, the processing can be replaced by saving the value held in the front register to the back register. Next, input from various sensors (start port 1 switch 36a, start port 2 switch 37a, usual gate switch 34a, count switch 38a, etc.), that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S52). )I do. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S53) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening SOL38b, general electric power SOL37c) and the like is performed.

  Next, command transmission processing (step S54), random number update processing 1 (step S55), random number update processing 2 (step S56) is performed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the usual gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a... 35n, and the count switch 38a. A prize opening switch / error monitoring process (step S57) is performed to determine whether the front frame or the glass frame is open. Also, a special figure game process (step S58) for performing a process related to the special figure variable display game and a general figure game process (step S59) for performing a process related to the general map variable display game are performed. The details of the special figure game process and the ordinary figure game process will be described later.

  Next, a segment LED editing process (step S60), which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED that displays various types of information related to display of special figure variation games and games, to display a desired content, magnetic sensor switch 61 And the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S61) which checks the detection signal from the vibration sensor switch 62 and determines whether there is any abnormality is performed. Then, external information editing processing (step S62) is performed in which signals to be output to various external devices are set in the output buffer. Subsequently, a process of clearing the interrupt request and declaring the end of the interrupt (step S63), a process of restoring the register data saved in step S51 (step S64), and a process of permitting the interrupt (step S64) Step S65) is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, the special game process (step S58) in the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11) will be described. In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the special figure game process, first, a start switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring a winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed.
In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the normal variable winning device 37 that forms the start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, and a special feature based on the winning is obtained. Prior to the start of the figure variation display game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which a game result based on a prize is determined in advance. The details of the start port switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, a count switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this count switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the count number of the count switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38 is performed. Then, a special figure game sequence branch table as shown in FIG. 13 to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is set in the register (step A3), and the special table is used. The process (step A4) of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the figure game process number is performed. Then, after performing the process of saving the return address after the branch process to the stack area (step A5), the game branch process (step A6) is performed according to the game process number.

  If the game process number is “0” in step A6, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of effects, and the special figure fluctuation processing are performed. A special figure routine process (step A7) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed. In step A6, when the game process number is “1”, the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure and setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display process is performed. (Step A8) is performed. Details of the special figure routine process (step A7) and the special figure changing process (step A8) will be described later.

  In step A6, if the game process number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, setting a fanfare command according to the big hit type (2R big hit or 15R big hit) Special chart display processing (step A9) for setting the fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each jackpot (2R jackpot or 15R jackpot), setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, etc. Do. In step A6, when the game process number is “3”, setting of the opening time of the big winning opening, updating of the number of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the big winning opening, etc. are performed. The fanfare / interval processing (step A10) is performed. Details of the special figure display processing (step A9) and the fanfare / interval processing (step A10) will be described later.

  In step A6, if the game process number is “4”, if the big hit round is not the final round, an interval command is set, while if it is the final round, a big hit end screen command is set. A large winning opening opening process (step A11) is performed for setting information necessary for performing the winning opening remaining ball processing. In step A6, if the game process number is “5”, if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls in the big prize opening and a big hit end process are performed. The big winning opening remaining ball processing (step A12) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed.

  If the game process number is “6” in step A6, a big hit end process (step A13) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process (step A9) is performed. If the game process number is “7” in step A6, the interval command is set while the final round is not the final round as in the case of the big prize opening opening process in step A11 described above. If so, a process for setting a command for the big hit end screen and a process for opening a special prize opening 2 (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing the special prize remaining ball process are performed. If the game process number is “8” in step A6, in order to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the small hitting process. A small hitting fanfare process (step A15) for setting necessary information and the like is performed. Details of the big hit end process (step A13) and the small hit fanfare process (step A15) will be described later.

  If the special figure game process number is “9” in step A6, a small hitting process (step A16) for setting an ending command, setting information necessary for performing a small hit remaining ball process, etc. I do. In step A6, if the special figure game process number is “10”, the information required for setting the time for opening the big prize opening by the small hit (opening the small hit) and opening the big prize opening. Small hitting / medium processing 2 (step A17) for setting and the like is performed. The details of the small hitting process (step A16) and the details of the transition setting process to the small hitting medium process 2 (step A17) will be described later.

  In step A6, when the special figure game process number is “11”, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls won in the big winning opening during the small hitting process, A small hit remaining ball process (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing the end process is performed. If the special figure game process number is “12” in step A6, a small hit end process (step A19) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process (step A7) is performed. . The details of the small hit remaining ball process (step A18) and the small hit end process (step A19) will be described later.

And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A20), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A21) which concerns on the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed. Then, after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A22), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A23) which concerns on the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed, and a special figure game process is performed. finish.
That is, the game control device 100 performs the first special variation display game based on the winning of the game ball in the first start winning area, and the second special variation display game based on the winning of the game ball in the second start winning area. It is functioning as a variable display game executing means for executing.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-described special figure game process (see FIG. 12) will be described.
As shown in FIG. 14, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, a table for setting information on hold by the start winning port 36 (first start port) is prepared (step A101). Step A102) is performed. The details of the special figure start port switch common process in step A102 will be described later together with the special figure start port switch common process in step A107.

Next, it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variation winning device 37) is in operation, that is, whether or not the ordinary variation winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is open. (Step A103) When it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is in operation (Step A103; Yes), the process proceeds to Step A106 and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A103 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A103; No), it is checked whether the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud occurrence determination number. (Step A104), processing for determining whether or not the number of fraudulent winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraud occurrence determination (Step A105).
The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud has occurred. When there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of illegal winnings thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value).

If it is determined in step A105 that the number of fraudulent winnings is not equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations (step A105; No), a table for setting information on hold by the normal variable winning device 37 (start port 2) is prepared (step A106). Then, the special start port switch common process (step A107) is performed, and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.
In addition, when it is determined in step A105 that the number of fraudulent winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations (step A105; Yes), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the special view start port switch common process (steps A102 and A107) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process (see FIG. 14) will be described.
The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in the special-purpose start port switch common process, first, of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, an input is made to the start port switch to be monitored (for example, the start port 1 switch 36a). If it is determined whether there is no input to the monitored start port switch (step A112; No), the special-purpose start port switch common process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step A112; Yes), after saving the start port winning flag of the monitored start port switch (step A113), The big hit random number extracted in the hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A114).

  Subsequently, of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored (for example, the start port 1 switch 36a) is sent to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The number of times output (start port signal control output number) is updated (+1), and it is checked whether the output number overflows (step A115). If it is determined that the number of outputs does not overflow (Step A116; No), the updated value is saved in the start signal output number area of the RWM (Step A117), and the process proceeds to Step A118. On the other hand, when it is determined in step A116 that the number of outputs overflows (step A116; Yes), the process proceeds to step A118.

  Then, in step A118, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, the update target special figure holding corresponding to the monitored start port switch (for example, the start port 1 switch 36a, etc.) is held (start memory). It is checked whether or not the number is less than the upper limit value, and processing for determining whether or not the special figure hold number is less than the upper limit value (step A119) is performed.

  If it is determined in step A119 that the number of special figure hold is less than the upper limit (step A119; Yes), a process for updating (+1) the special figure hold number to be updated (for example, the special figure 1 hold number) ( After performing step A120), a decoration special figure reservation number command (MODE) is prepared for the start port switch to be monitored (for example, the start port 1 switch 36a) of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a. After that (step A121), a decoration special figure hold number command (ACTION) corresponding to the special figure hold number is prepared (step A122), and a command setting process (step A123) is performed.

  Then, processing for calculating the address of the random number saving area corresponding to the special figure hold number (step A124) is performed, and the big hit random number is saved in the random number saving area of the RWM (step A125). Then, the jackpot symbol random number of the target starter switch is extracted and prepared, and the corresponding jackpot symbol random number is saved in the random number save area of the RWM (step A126). Next, the corresponding variation pattern random number 1 is extracted, and the extracted value is saved in the random number save area of the RWM (step A127). Next, the corresponding variation pattern random number 2 is extracted, and the extracted value is saved in the random number save area of the RWM (step A128).

  Next, the corresponding variation pattern random number 3 is extracted, and the extracted value is saved in the random number save area of the RWM (step A129). A set of various random numbers saved in steps A125 to A129 becomes one start-up memory. Here, if this processing is performed based on a winning at the start winning opening 36, the first starting storage is performed, and if this processing is performed based on a winning at the normal variable winning device 37, the second starting storage is performed. Then, the jackpot symbol random number of the target starter switch is loaded from the random number save area of the RWM, prepared (step A130), the special figure hold information determination process (step A131) is performed, and the special figure starter switch common process Exit. The details of the special figure hold information determination process will be described later.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A119 that the special figure hold number is not less than the upper limit (step A119; No), it is checked whether or not the input of the start port switch related to step A112 is the input of the start port 1 switch 36a. (Step A132), if it is determined that the input of the start port 1 switch 36a is (Step A133; Yes), a decoration special figure hold number command (overflow command) is prepared (Step A134), and a command setting process (Step A135). ) To complete the special figure start port switch common process. Also, when it is determined in step A133 that the input of the start port 1 switch 36a is not input (step A133; No), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

  That is, the game control apparatus 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball in the first start winning area, stores the extracted random number as the first start memory, and stores the predetermined number as the upper limit, and the second start Based on the winning of the game ball in the winning area, a predetermined random number is extracted, and the extracted random number is used as a second starting memory and functions as a starting storage means for storing the predetermined number at the upper limit.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the special figure hold information determination process (step A131) in the special figure start port switch common process (see FIG. 15) will be described.
The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetching process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in the special figure hold information determination process, first, based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning apparatus 37, that is, the start opening 1 according to step A112 of the special figure start opening switch common processing. Of the switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, if there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored, it is checked whether the input satisfies the conditions for executing the prefetch effect (step A141), and the input is the prefetch effect. It is determined whether or not a condition for executing is satisfied (step A142). In the present embodiment, the condition for executing the pre-reading effect is that the normal power support state is not occurring and the big hit is not being hit.

  And in step A142, when the conditions which may perform a prefetch effect are not satisfy | filled (step A142; No), a special figure pending | holding information determination process is complete | finished. On the other hand, when the conditions for executing the prefetch effect are satisfied (step A142; Yes), the big hit determination process (step A143) for determining whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in the big hit (special game state). Then, using the jackpot random number stored as the start memory, a process of determining whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory is a big hit (step A144) is performed.

If it is determined in step A144 that it is a big hit (step A144; Yes), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the starter switch to be monitored is set (step A145), and the big hit symbol random number is checked. The corresponding winning information pointer is acquired (step A146). Then, the address table of the jackpot information table is set (step A147), the jackpot information table corresponding to the winning information pointer is acquired and set (step A148), and the process proceeds to step A153.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A144 that the game is not a big hit (step A144; No), using the big hit random number stored as the start memory, the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory becomes the small hit. A small hit determination process (step A149) is performed to determine whether or not. Here, when it is determined that the determination result is a small hit (step A150; Yes), a small hit information table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step A151), and the process proceeds to step A153. On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result is not a small hit (step A150; No), a loss information table is set (step A152), and the process proceeds to step A153.

  In step A153, symbol information is acquired from the set information table (big hit information table, small hit information table, or disparity information table), and the acquired symbol information is saved in the symbol information (work) area. Next, the start opening winning effect symbol command is acquired from the set information table, and the acquired starting opening winning effect symbol command is saved in the winning effect symbol command area (step A154).

  Subsequently, a start port winning flag of the start port switch to be monitored is prepared (step A155), a start port winning effect command setting table to be monitored is prepared (step A156), and special figure information setting processing (step A157), Second half variation pattern setting processing (step A158) and variation pattern setting processing (step A159) are performed. Then, a start opening prize effect command (MODE: game result information) corresponding to the first variation number is calculated and prepared (step A160), and the second variation number value is determined as a prior determination command starting opening prize effect. A command (ACTION: game result information) is prepared (step A161), and a command setting process (step A162) is performed. Subsequently, a start opening winning winning design command (game result information) as a winning pre-drawing design command is loaded and prepared (step A163) from the winning design symbol command area, and command setting processing (step A164) is performed. The hold information determination process ends.

  As a result of this processing, when the start memory is the first start memory, that is, when the input of the start port switch according to step A112 of the special-purpose start port switch common processing is the start port 1 switch 36a, the ordinary power support state occurs. However, only when the special gaming state has not occurred, the prefetching process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start-up memory is performed. On the other hand, when the start memory is the second start memory, that is, when the input of the start port switch according to step A112 of the special-purpose start port switch common processing is the start port 2 switch 37a, the normally variable winning device 37 is being supported, Or, regardless of whether or not a big hit is made, a pre-reading process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start-up memory is performed. That is, the game control device 100 functions as a pre-start determination unit that determines information related to the special variation display game based on the start storage stored in the start storage unit before the start of the special variation display game. The result-related information determination result (prefetching result) corresponding to the display control device 300 can be notified before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory, and is displayed on the display device 41 in particular. It is possible to notify the player of the result related information before the start timing of the special figure variation display game, for example, by changing the number of special figure holds.

[Count switch monitoring processing]
Next, the count switch monitoring process (step A2) in the above-described special figure game process (see FIG. 12) will be described.
As shown in FIG. 17, in the count switch monitoring process, first, it is checked whether or not the big winning opening based on the small hit is being performed (step A201). Here, when it is determined that the big winning opening based on the small hit is being made (step A202; Yes), the small hit count update process is performed (step A203), and the count switch monitoring process is terminated. Details of the small hit count update process (step A203) will be described later.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A202 that the big prize opening based on the small hit is not performed (step A202; No), it is checked whether the big prize opening based on the big hit is being performed ( Step A204). Here, when it is determined that the big winning opening based on the jackpot is not opened (step A205; No), the count switch monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the big winning opening based on the big hit is being made (step A205; Yes), it is checked whether there is an input to the count switch 38a (step A206). If it is determined that there is no input to the count switch 38a (step A207; No), the count switch monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an input (step A207; Yes), the big hit count update process is performed (step A208), and the count switch monitoring process is terminated. Details of the big hit count update process (step A208) will be described later.

[Counting update process for small hits]
Next, the small hit count update process (step A203) in the above-described count switch monitoring process (see FIG. 17) will be described.
As shown in FIG. 18, in the small hit count update process, first, it is checked whether there is an input to the count switch 38a (step A210). Here, when it is determined that there is no input to the count switch (step A211; No), the small hit count update process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an input (step A211; Yes), is a specific small hit (that is, a small hit by the normal variable winning device 37 (special figure 2) in the winning easy state in the normal state) being executed? It is determined whether or not (step A212). Here, when it is determined that the specific small hit is not executed (step A212; No), the process proceeds to step A216.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the specific small win is being executed (step A212; Yes), the small winning prize information is updated by +1 (step A213), and a small winning prize number command is prepared based on the small winning prize information. (Step A214), command setting processing is performed (Step A215), and the process proceeds to Step A216.

In step A216, the count number information at the special winning opening is updated by +1, and then it is checked whether the count number of the special winning opening has reached the upper limit (step A217). Here, when it is determined that the count number of the big winning opening has not reached the upper limit (step A218; No), the small hit count update process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of counts of the big winning mouth has reached the upper limit (step A218; Yes), the special figure game process timer is cleared to “0” (step A219), and the small hit count update process is performed. finish.
With the above processing, in the case of a small hit (specific small hit) by the normal variation winning device 37 (special figure 2) in the winning easy state in the normal state, the number of wins per the small win is counted.

[Big hit count update processing]
Next, the big hit count update process (step A208) in the above-described count switch monitoring process (see FIG. 17) will be described.
As shown in FIG. 19, in the big hit count update process, first, the count number information in the big prize opening is updated by +1 (step A220), and then it is checked whether the count number of the big prize mouth has reached the upper limit ( Step A221). Here, when it is determined that the count number of the big winning prize has not reached the upper limit (step A222; No), the big hit count update process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of counts for the big winning mouth has reached the upper limit (step A222; Yes), the special game process timer is cleared to "0" (step A223), and the big hit count update process is terminated. To do.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, the special figure routine process (step A7) in the above-described special figure game process (see FIG. 12) will be described.
As shown in FIG. 20, in the special figure routine process, first, it is checked whether the special figure game process timer has already expired or whether the special figure game process timer has expired (-1). Step A301), and when it is determined that the time is not up (Step A302; No), the special figure routine processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure game processing timer has expired (step A302; Yes), it is checked whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) is 0 (step A303).

  When it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step A304; Yes), it is checked whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) is 0 (step A305). Then, if it is determined that the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (step A306; Yes), it is checked whether or not the customer waiting demo has already started (step A307), and the customer waiting demo has not started. That is, if it is determined that the process has not been started (step A308; No), a process of setting the customer waiting demo flag during the customer waiting demo is performed (step A309).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A310), a command setting process is performed (step A311), and the process proceeds to step A312.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A308 that the customer waiting demo has already started (step A308; Yes), the customer waiting demo flag is already set in the customer waiting demo (step A309), and a customer waiting demo command is also prepared. Since (step A310) and command setting processing (step A311) are also executed, the processing proceeds to step A312 without performing these processing.

  In step A312, a process for preparing a table for shifting to the special figure normal process is performed. Specifically, a process of setting a processing number “0” related to the special figure routine process, a flag (big prize opening fraud monitoring information) for defining a big prize opening fraud monitoring period, and the like in the table is performed. When the process of step A312 is completed, the special figure routine process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A304 that the special figure 2 holding number is not 0 (step A304; No), special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is performed (step A313). Details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process in step A313 will be described later.
Then, a process (step A314) for preparing a table (for the second special figure) for shifting to the special figure changing process (step A314), specifically, the process number “1” relating to the special figure changing process is included in the table. , Information relating to the end of the customer waiting demonstration, test signals relating to the fluctuation of the second special figure, information for controlling the second special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52 (for example, the special figure 2 display 52 And the like, and a special figure normal processing is completed.

If it is determined in step A306 that the special figure 1 hold count is not 0 (step A306; No), special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is performed (step A315). Details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process in step A315 will be described later.
Then, a process (step A316) for preparing a table (for the first special figure) for shifting to the special figure changing process (step A316), specifically, the process number “1” relating to the special figure changing process is included in the table. , Information related to the end of the customer waiting demonstration, test signals related to the fluctuation of the first special figure, information for controlling the first special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 (for example, the special figure 1 display 51 And the like, and a special figure normal processing is finished.

  In this way, if the special figure 2 hold number in step A303 and step A304 is checked before the special figure 1 hold number check in step A305 and step A306, the special figure 2 hold number is not zero. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A313) will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, the game control device 100 functions as priority means for causing the variable display game execution means to execute the second special variable display game when both the first start memory and the second start memory are stored.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A315) in the special figure usual process (see FIG. 20) will be described.
The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21, first, whether or not the first special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit. The jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the jackpot flag 1 is set to set the shift information or jackpot information (step A321). Next, a small hit flag 1 setting process for setting shift information and small hit information is performed on the small hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a small hit (step A322). Note that the small hit flag 1 setting process in step A322 performs the same process as the small hit flag 2 setting process. Then, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process relating to the setting of the first special figure stop symbol (special figure 1 stop symbol), the probability variation determination flag, the special winning opening release information, etc. (step A323), the first special symbol stop symbol is set. The test signal corresponding to the figure stop symbol number (Special Fig. 1 stop symbol) is saved (step A324). Subsequently, the symbol information set in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is saved in the symbol information area for work of the RWM (step A325).

  Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag is set and prepared (step A326), and the special figure 1 fluctuation flag is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area of the RWM (step A327). Subsequently, a table (for special figure 1) relating to setting of information relating to the variation pattern is prepared (step A328), and special figure information setting processing (step A329) for setting special figure information is performed. Subsequently, after performing the latter half variation pattern setting process for setting the latter half variation pattern among the variation modes in the first special figure variation display game (step A330), the variation setting the variation aspect of the first special figure variation display game. Pattern setting processing is performed (step A331). Then, the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the fluctuation start information of the first special figure is performed (step A332), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A313) in the special figure usual process (see FIG. 20) will be described.
The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process that is performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22, first, whether or not the second special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit. The big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the big hit flag 2 is set to set the shift information or the big hit information (step A341). Next, a small hit flag 2 setting process for setting shift information and small hit information is performed on the small hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the second special figure variation display game is a small hit (step A342). Details of the small hit flag 2 setting process in step A342 will be described later.

  Subsequently, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the second special symbol stop symbol, the probability variation determination flag, the special prize opening information, etc. (step A343), it corresponds to the special figure 2 stop symbol number. The test signal is saved (step A344). Subsequently, the symbol information set in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is saved in the symbol information area for work of the RWM (step A345).

  Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag is loaded and prepared (step A346), and the special figure 2 fluctuation flag is saved in the special figure fluctuation flag area of the RWM (step A347). Subsequently, a table (for special figure 2) relating to setting of information relating to the variation pattern is prepared (step A348), and special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information is performed (step A349). Subsequently, among the variation modes in the second special figure variation display game, the second half variation pattern setting process for setting the latter half variation pattern is performed (step A350), and then the variation for setting the variation aspect of the second special figure variation display game. Pattern setting processing is performed (step A351). Thereafter, the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the fluctuation start information of the second special figure is performed (step A352), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is ended.

  In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A341), the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343), the special figure information setting process (step A349), and the latter half fluctuation pattern setting process (step A350). ), Variation pattern setting process (step A351), and variation start information setting process (step A352) are respectively a big hit flag 1 setting process (step A321) and a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A321) in the special figure 1 variation start process (step A352). Step A322), special figure information setting processing (step A328), second half variation pattern setting processing (step A329), variation pattern setting processing (step A330), and variation start information setting processing (step A331) are substantially the same.

[Small hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the small hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 22) will be described.
In the small hit flag 2 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area of the RWM (step A360), and then the big hit flag set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in step A341 of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process It is checked whether 2 is a big hit (step A361). Here, when it is determined that the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A362; Yes), the small hit flag 2 setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step A362 that the big hit flag 2 is not big hit (step A362; No), the big hit random number is loaded from the RWM big hit random number save area (for special figure 2) and prepared (step A363), Special figure 2 determination data is prepared (step A364), and a small hit determination process for determining whether the acquired big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not is determined (step A365). )I do. Details of the small hit determination process in step A365 will be described later.

  If it is determined that the determination result of the small hit determination process in step A365 is a small hit (step A366; Yes), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 2 in which the loss information is saved in step A360. After (Step A367), the RWM big hit random number save area (for special figure 2) is cleared to 0 (Step A368), and the small hit flag 2 setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the determination result of the small hit determination process in step A365 is not a small hit (step A366; No), the small hit flag 2 setting process is terminated with the shift information saved in the small hit flag 2. .

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the small hit determination process (step A365) in the small hit flag 2 setting process (see FIG. 23) will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 24, in the small hit determination process, first, a process of setting a lower limit determination value for the small hit determination is performed (step A370). Thereafter, it is checked whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value, that is, the big hit random value read in step A363 in FIG. 23 is the lower limit of the small hit judgment value of the big hit random number. If it is determined whether the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value for the small hit determination (step A372; No), the prepared determination data is shown in FIG. It is checked whether it is the special figure 1 determination data for determination (step A373).

  Here, if it is determined that the prepared determination data is the special figure 1 determination data for determining the special figure 1 (step A374; Yes), the small hit in the case where the big hit random number is the small hit of the special figure 1 An upper limit value for determination (special figure 1 small hit upper limit determination value) is set (step A375), and the process proceeds to step A377.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A374 that the prepared determination data is not the special figure 1 determination data for determining special figure 1 (step A374; No), the big hit random number is the small hit in special figure 2 In this case, an upper limit value for small hit determination (special figure 2 small hit upper limit determination value) is set (step A376), and the process proceeds to step A377.

  In step A377, it is checked whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the set small hit upper limit determination value. If it is determined that the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A378; Yes), After setting the gap information (step A379), the small hit determination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step A378 that the value of the target big hit random number is smaller than the set small hit upper limit determination value (step A378; No), the value of the big hit random number is the open mode A (that is, It is checked whether the opening mode of the big winning opening by the small hit is the opening mode A (see FIG. 6D)) (step A380), and when it is determined that it is the opening mode A (step A381; Yes), the determination result After the small hit A information indicating the open mode A is set in the big hit random number (step A382), the small hit determination process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step A381 that the value of the big hit random number is not the release mode A (step A381; No), the big hit random number is added to the big hit random number as a determination result (that is, the big winning opening is released by the small hit). After setting the mode to be the open mode B (see FIG. 6D)) (step A383), the small hit determination process is terminated.

  Further, when it is determined in step A372 that the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value for the small hit determination (step A372; Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value. The small hit determination process is terminated without performing the processes of steps A373 to A378 and steps A380 to A383 related to the determination of whether or not the value of the big hit random number is the release mode A.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, the special figure changing process (step A8) in the special figure game process (see FIG. 12) will be described.
As shown in FIG. 25, in the special figure changing process, first, it is checked whether the special figure game processing timer has already timed up or has been up after the special figure game processing timer has been updated (-1). (Step A401), and when it is determined that the time is not up (Step A402; No), the special figure changing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol game processing timer has expired (step A402; Yes), the stop symbol information set in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is checked (step A403), and the stop symbol information is set. When it is determined that the symbol information is not out of place (step A404; No), a special figure display time pointer is set when the special result mode is derived in the special figure fluctuation display game to be a big hit or a small hit (step A405) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A410.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step A404 that the stopped symbol information is out of symbol information (step A404; Yes), whether or not the latter half variation number set in the latter half variation pattern setting process is a number without reach. (Step A406), if it is determined that the latter half variation number is not a reachless number, that is, a reachable number (step A407; No), a special result mode is displayed in the special figure variation display game. Is not derived, and a process of setting a special figure display time pointer when the reach state occurs (step A408) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A410.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A407 that the second half variation number is a non-reach number (step A407; Yes), the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game, and it is out of place. If the reach state does not occur, a special figure stop time pointer is set (step A409), and the process proceeds to step A410.

  In step A410, a special figure display time table is set. Thereafter, the display time corresponding to the special figure display time pointer set in any of steps A405, A408, and A409, that is, the special figure stop time pointer at the big hit set in step A405, set in step A408 A process of obtaining a stop time corresponding to either the special figure stop time pointer at the time of reach deviation or the special figure stop time pointer set at step A409 (at the time of release without reach occurrence) After performing step A411), the acquired stop time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area of the RWM (step A412).

  Then, a process for preparing a table for shifting to the special figure display process, specifically, the process number “2” related to the special figure display process, the first special figure, and the second special figure are included in the table. Test signal related to fluctuation stop, symbol fixed number signal related to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal, the first special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 And a process for setting information for controlling the second special figure fluctuation display game (for example, a flag relating to the fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52) (step A413), The special figure changing process is terminated.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, the special figure display process (step A9) in the special figure game process (see FIG. 12) will be described.
As shown in FIG. 26, in the special figure display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the special figure 2 variation start process is loaded (step A420), and the small hit flag 2 area of the RWM is cleared. (Step A421). Next, the small hit flag 1 set in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (step A422), and the RWM small hit flag 1 area is cleared (step A423).

  Thereafter, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A424), and the RWM big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step A425). Then, the loaded jackpot flag 2 is checked (step A426), and if it is a jackpot (step A427; Yes), the RWM jackpot flag 1 area is cleared (step A428). Here, the game control device 100 functions as special game state occurrence determination means for determining whether or not to generate a special game state. Next, a signal relating to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the second special figure fluctuation display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A428), and the round number upper limit value table is set (step A435). ), The process proceeds to step A436.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A427 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A427; No), the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded. (Step A430), the RWM jackpot flag 1 area is cleared (Step A431). Then, the loaded jackpot flag 1 is checked (step A432), and if it is a jackpot (step A433; Yes), a signal relating to the start of the jackpot (special chart 1 jackpot) of the first special figure variation display game is sent to the RWM. Are saved in the test signal output data area (step A434), a round number upper limit table is set (step A435), and the process proceeds to step A436. Here, the game control device 100 functions as special game state occurrence determination means for determining whether or not to generate a special game state.

  In step A436, the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area of the RWM. Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A437).

  Next, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of a hit result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game as a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A438), and a command setting process (Step A439) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information is prepared (step A440), and command setting processing (step A441) is performed. After that, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern information related to the decoration special figure variation display game is loaded and prepared from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM (step A442), and a command setting process (step A443) is performed.

  Next, a signal corresponding to the special winning opening information is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A444). Subsequently, a signal corresponding to the probability state of the hit result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A445). Thereafter, a big hit fanfare time corresponding to the big prize opening information is set (step A446), and the big hit fanfare time is saved in the special game processing timer (step A447). Thereafter, after resetting the number of illegal winnings to the special winning opening (step A448), the illegal winning period illegal monitoring period flag is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag (step A449). Then, a fanfare / interval process transition setting process (step A450) for shifting to a fanfare / interval process is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.

If it is determined in step A433 that the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit as a result of the check (step A433; No), the process proceeds to step A451 shown in FIG.
In step A451, it is checked whether or not the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A451), and if it is not a small hit (step A452; No), it is checked whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit ( Step A453), if it is not a small hit (Step A454; No), after performing the number-of-changes update process (Step A455), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (Step A456) for shifting to the special figure normal process To complete the special figure display process.

  If it is determined in step A452 that the small hit flag 1 is a result of the check (step A452; Yes), or if the small hit flag 2 is checked in step A454, When it is determined that there is a certain (Step A454; Yes), the fan count command is prepared (Step A458) and the command setting process (Step A459) is performed after the fluctuation number update processing is performed (Step A457). The details of the fluctuation number update process (steps A455 and A457) will be described later.

  Subsequently, a command is loaded from the decoration special figure command area, prepared (step A460), and command setting processing is performed (step A461). Next, it is checked whether or not the small hit big winning opening information is the small hit opening information of special figure 2 (step A462), and if the small hit big winning opening information is not the small hit opening information of special figure 2 (step A463) No) performs the small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 (step A464) for shifting to the small hitting fanfare mid-process shown in FIG. Further, when the small hit big winning opening information is the small hit release information of special figure 2 (step A463; Yes), the small hit fanfare mid-process shift to shift to special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process. Setting process 2 is performed (step A465), and the special figure display process is terminated.

[Variation count update processing]
Next, the details of the fluctuation number update process (step A455) in the above-described special chart display process (see FIG. 27) will be described.
As shown in FIG. 28, in the fluctuation number update process, if it is determined in step A454 in the special figure display process that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A454; No), first, the mode is being changed due to the small hit. It is determined whether or not there is a mode change flag (step A470). Here, when it is determined that the mode is not being changed due to the small hit (step A470; No), the normal number of times update processing is performed (step A471), and then the variation number of times update processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A470 that the mode is being changed due to the small hit (step A470; Yes), the mode stay count is updated by -1 (step A472), and the mode stay count is zero. It is determined whether or not there is (step A473). Note that the number of mode stays is a special variable display that stays in a mode with a different reach rate based on the number of wins in a special gaming state (at the time of a small hit as the second special gaming state) by deriving a predetermined special result mode The number of game executions, for example, 10 is set as the initial value.

  Here, when it is determined that the number of mode stays is not 0 (step A473; No), that is, when the mode is changed even in the next special figure variation display game, the variation number update process is terminated. On the other hand, it is determined that the number of mode stays is 0 (step A473; Yes), that is, the period during which the mode is changed in the current special figure fluctuation display game is ended (a predetermined number of special figure fluctuation display games are executed). If cleared, the RWM mode stay count area is reset (step A474), the mode change flag is cleared (step A475), and the corresponding mode information (ie, to return to the normal mode) is set ( Step A476).

Then, after setting the probability information command corresponding to the mode information (step A477), command setting processing is performed (step A478), the corresponding variation pattern table is set (step A479), and the variation count update processing is terminated. .
By this process, the mode state that has been shifted based on the number of winnings at the time of a small hit is managed by the number of times set based on the stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stop in the special figure display process.

[Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing]
Next, the fanfare / interval process transition setting process (step A450) in the above special figure display process (see FIG. 26) will be described. Here, a process of setting a transition to the fanfare / interval process (step A10) in the special figure game process (see FIG. 12) described above is performed.
As shown in FIG. 29, in the fanfare / interval process transition setting process, first, “3” is set as the process number in the special game sequence branch table (see FIG. 13) (step A500), and this process number is set to RWM. Is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A501). Then, a signal relating to the start of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A502), and a signal relating to the end of the special figure high probability state and the short time state is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A503). . Then, the large winning opening illegal winning number area is reset (step A504), and the round number area is reset (step A505).

  Next, a low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step A506), and a flag indicating a normal low probability state and no ordinary power support state is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (step A507). . Then, the variable symbol determination flag area is reset (step A508), the high probability notification flag area is reset (step A509), and the flag indicating the special figure low probability state is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A510). To do. Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A511), and the time variation count area is reset (step A512). Then, an initial value is set in the usual high probability lottery number area (step A513), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process is terminated. The initial value set in step A513 is the maximum number of times that the common figure high probability transition lottery can be executed in the usual figure high probability transition lottery period, and is determined based on the jackpot symbol. Note that this initial value may be determined not based on the jackpot symbol, but based on a lottery by a random number or the like, or the number of special figure variation display games executed until the jackpot.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the fanfare / interval process (step A10) in the above-described special-figure game process (see FIG. 12) will be described.
As shown in FIG. 30, in the process during the fanfare / interval, first, it is checked whether the special figure game process timer has already expired or has expired after the special figure game process timer has been updated (-1). (Step A520), and when it is determined that the time is not up (Step A521; No), the usual high probability transition lottery process is performed (Step A522), and the fanfare / interval process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure game processing timer has timed up (step A521; Yes), a process for updating (+1) the number of rounds in the special gaming state is performed (step A523), and then the special winning opening information is released. Is a long opening (for example, 25 seconds) with a long opening time of the big winning opening, that is, whether or not the number of rounds per jackpot is 15R (step A524). The details of the usual high probability transition lottery process will be described later.

  Here, when it is determined that the big prize opening information is not long open, that is, when the big prize opening information is short opening (step A525; No), a short opening time (for example, 1.6 seconds) is set. After setting (step A526), the process proceeds to step A532. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special winning opening information is long open (step A525; Yes), a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A527), and command setting processing (step A528) is performed. Do. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol information related to the decoration special figure variation display game is loaded and prepared from the RWM decoration special figure command area (step A529), and a command setting process (step A530) is performed.

  And after performing the process which sets long opening time (25 seconds) as opening time (opening time of a big winning opening) of the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable prize-winning apparatus 38 in each round of a special game state (step A531), Control goes to step A532. In step A532, the release time set in step A526 or A531 is saved in the special figure game processing timer. Thereafter, a process for preparing a table for shifting to the process for opening the special winning opening, more specifically, in the above-mentioned special figure game sequence branch table (see FIG. 13), the process number “ 4 ”, a test signal related to the opening of the grand prize opening, a control signal (ON signal) related to driving of the big prize opening solenoid 38b for opening the big prize opening, information related to clearing the number of winnings in the big prize opening, etc. Is set (step A533), and the fanfare / interval processing is terminated.

  As a result of this processing, when the number of rounds per jackpot is 15R, the opening time of the big prize opening is the long opening time (25 seconds) related to the long opening, and when the number of rounds per jackpot is 2R, The opening time is a short opening time (1.6 seconds) related to the short opening. Further, if the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, if the 2R probability variation winning is achieved), it is possible to execute the usual high probability transition lottery while the fanfare is flowing.

[Normal drawing high probability transfer lottery processing]
Next, the common high probability transition lottery process (step A522) in the above-described fanfare / interval process (see FIG. 30) will be described.
As shown in FIG. 31, in the ordinary high probability lottery process, first, the presence / absence of the ordinary high probability lottery flag is checked (step A540), and when there is no ordinary high probability lottery flag (step A541; No). Then, the usual high probability transition lottery process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is a usual high probability lottery flag (step A541; Yes), the number of lotteries is updated by -1 (step A542). Then, the normal high probability lottery random number is acquired (step A543), and the acquired general high probability lottery random number is compared with the determination value (step A544).

  Here, when it is determined that the normal figure high probability transfer lottery is won (step A545; Yes), a flag indicating the normal figure high probability state and the general electric support state is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A546). ). Then, the ordinary high probability lottery number area is cleared (step A548), the ordinary high probability lottery flag is cleared (step A549), and the ordinary high probability lottery process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal high probability transfer lottery is not won (step A545; No), it is determined whether or not the remaining number of lotteries has become zero (step A547). Here, when it is determined that the remaining number of lotteries is not zero (step A547; No), the normal high probability transition lottery process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining number of lotteries has reached 0 (step A547; Yes), the process proceeds to step A548 and the subsequent processing is performed.

  With this process, if the usual figure high probability lottery flag is set, the usual figure high probability lottery can be executed a predetermined number of times during the usual figure high probability lottery period (during the 2R jackpot fanfare). And when the said lottery is won, a common figure high probability state and a general electric power support state generate | occur | produce. In addition, after winning the usual high probability transfer lottery, the lottery will not be performed even if the number of lotteries still remains.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the big hit ending process (step A13) in the above-described special figure game process (see FIG. 12) will be described.
As shown in FIG. 32, in the jackpot ending process, first, it is checked whether the special figure game process timer has already expired or has expired after the special figure game process timer has been updated (-1) (step A701), and when it is determined that the time is not up (step A702; No), the jackpot end processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure game processing timer has expired (step A702; Yes), the probability variation determination flag set based on the type of the special result mode that triggered the execution of the special game state of this time is set. Load (step A703), and branch processing based on the probability variation determination flag is performed (step A704).

  Here, when the probability variation determination flag is “0”, that is, the special result is 15R probability variation A (after the special gaming state ends, the special figure high probability state and the short time state), the jackpot end setting processing 1 is performed (step A705). In addition, when the probability variation determination flag is “1”, that is, the special result mode is 15R probability variation B (after the special gaming state ends, the special figure high probability state and the state without time reduction) are set. Process 2 is performed (step A706).

  Further, the probability variation determination flag is “2”, that is, the special result mode is 15R normal A (after the special gaming state ends, the special figure low probability state is entered, and after the special gaming state ends 100 times In the case where there is no time saving until the special figure variation display game is executed), the big hit end setting process 3 is performed (step A707). Also, if the probability variation determination flag is “3”, that is, the special result mode is 15R normal B (after the special gaming state ends, the special figure low probability state and the state without time reduction), the jackpot end setting is set. Process 4 is performed (step A708). Further, when the probability variation determination flag is “4”, that is, the special result mode is 2R probability change (after the special gaming state ends, the special figure high probability state, the state without time reduction), the big hit end setting process 5 is performed (step A709).

  Then, after performing one of the big hit end setting processes 1 to 5, a probability information command corresponding to the probability variation determination flag is prepared (step A710), and the command setting process is performed (step A711). The probability information command is transmitted later to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 sets production contents based on this information. Then, special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is performed (step A712), and the jackpot end process is terminated. In the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A712), a process for setting the processing number “0” relating to the special figure normal process, a flag (big prize fraud monitoring information) for defining the special prize fraud monitoring period, etc. Do.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
Next, the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A705) in the above jackpot end process (see FIG. 32) will be described.
As shown in FIG. 33, in the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start of the high probability state is saved in the external information output data area (step A721), and the signal related to the start of the high probability state is stored in the test signal output data area. (Step A722). Next, the number at the time of high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step A723), and the flag indicating the special figure high probability state and the short time state is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A724). Then, a flag indicating the normal high probability state and the general power support state is saved in the normal game mode flag area (step A725), and a probability information command (high probability A) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A725). A726). Thereafter, the short time variation count area is reset (step A727), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is ended.
By the above processing, after the special gaming state is ended, the special figure high probability state and the short time state are obtained. In addition, the probability state after the state transition is clearly notified.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A706) in the above jackpot end process (see FIG. 32) will be described.
As shown in FIG. 34, in the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of the latent state A (special low probability, no short time, no probability state notification) is saved in the external information output data area (step A731). ), A signal related to the start of the latent state A is saved in the test signal output data area (step A732). Next, the number of the latent state A is saved in the game state display number area (step A733), and the flag indicating the special figure high probability state and no time reduction state is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A734). Then, a flag indicating a normal low probability state and no general power support state is saved in the normal game mode flag area (step A735), and a probability information command (latency probability variation A) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery ( Step A736). Thereafter, the short time variation count area is reset (step A737), and the big hit end setting process 2 is ended.
By the above processing, after the special gaming state is finished, the special figure high probability state is entered and the time is not shortened. In addition, the probability state after the state transition is not clearly notified.

[Big jackpot end setting 3]
Next, the jackpot end setting process 3 (step A707) in the above jackpot end process (see FIG. 32) will be described.
As shown in FIG. 35, in the jackpot end setting process 3, first, a signal related to the start of the time reduction state is saved in the external information output data area (step A741), and a signal related to the start of the time reduction state is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step A742). Next, the number at the time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step A743), and the flag indicating the special figure low probability state and the time reduction state is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A744). Then, a flag indicating the ordinary high probability state and the ordinary power support state is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (step A745), and the probability information command (short time) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A746). . Thereafter, the initial value (100) of the time variation number is set in the time variation region (step A747), and the big hit end setting process 3 is terminated.
By the above processing, after the special game state is ended, the special figure low probability state is entered, and the time is shortened until a predetermined number (100 times) of the special figure variation display game is executed. In addition, the probability state after the state transition is clearly notified.

[Big hit end setting process 4]
Next, the big hit end setting process 4 (step A708) in the big hit end process (see FIG. 32) will be described.
As shown in FIG. 36, in the jackpot end setting process 4, first, a signal related to the start of the latent state B is saved in the external information output data area (step A751), and a signal related to the start of the latent state B is stored in the test signal output data area. (Step A752). Next, the number in the latent state B is saved in the game state display number area (step A753), and the flag indicating the special figure low probability state and no time saving state is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A754). Then, a flag indicating a normal low probability state and no general power support state is saved in the normal game mode flag area (step A755), and a probability information command (latency probability change B) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery ( Step A756). Thereafter, the time-varying frequency region is reset (step A757), and the big hit end setting process 4 is ended.
As a result of the above processing, after the special gaming state is ended, the special figure low probability state is entered, and the time is not shortened. In addition, the probability state after the state transition is not clearly notified.

[Big hit end setting process 5]
Next, the jackpot end setting process 5 (step A709) in the above jackpot end process (see FIG. 32) will be described.
As shown in FIG. 37, in the jackpot end setting process 5, first, a signal related to the start of the latent state C is saved in the external information output data area (step A761), and a signal related to the start of the latent state C is stored in the test signal output data area. (Step A762). Next, the number in the latent state C is saved in the game state display number area (step A763), and the flag indicating the high probability state and no time reduction state is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A764). Then, a flag indicating a normal low probability state and no general power support state is saved in the normal game mode flag area (step A765), and a probability information command (latency probability change C) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery ( Step A766). Thereafter, the short time variation count area is reset (step A767), and the big hit end setting process 5 is ended.
By the above processing, after the special gaming state is ended, the special figure high probability state is set, and the operation state of the normal variation winning device 37 is set to the normal operation state. In addition, the probability state after the state transition is not clearly notified.

[Small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1]
Next, before the detailed description of the small hit fanfare processing (step A15) in the special figure game process (see FIG. 12) described above, the small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting in the case where the special figure 2 has one small hit is set. Processing 1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, in the small hitting fanfare process transition setting process 1, first, “8” is set as the process number (step A811), and this process number is saved in the special game process number area of the RWM ( Step A812). Then, the small hitting fanfare time is set (step A813), and the set small hitting fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A814). Then, the signal relating to the start of the small hit 1 according to the special figure 2 is saved in the external information output data area (step A815a), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A816a).

  Subsequently, the round LED pointer for small hits is acquired, saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A817), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is reset (step A818). Next, after resetting the number of illegal winnings to the big winning opening (step A819), the illegal winning period fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning opening illegal monitoring period flag (step A449), and the small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 Exit.

[Small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 2]
Next, a description will be given of the small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 2 when a plurality of small hits in FIG. As shown in FIG. 39, in the small hit fanfare process transition setting process 2, first, “8” is set as the process number (step A811), and this process number is saved in the special figure game process number area of the RWM (step A811). Step A812). Then, the small hitting fanfare time is set (step A813), and the set small hitting fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A814). Then, a signal related to the start of the corresponding small hit among a plurality of small hits according to FIG. 2 is saved in the external information output data area (step A815b), and the signal related to the start of the corresponding small hit is sent to the test signal output data. Save in the area (step A816b).

  Subsequently, the round LED pointer for small hits is acquired, saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A817), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is reset (step A818). Next, after resetting the number of illegal winnings to the big winning opening (step A819), the illegal winning period fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning opening illegal monitoring period flag (step A449), and the small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 2 Exit.

[Small fanfare during processing]
Next, the small hit fanfare process (step A15) in the special figure game process (see FIG. 12) described above will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 40, in the small hitting fanfare processing in the present embodiment, first, the special figure game processing timer has already timed up, or the special figure game processing timer has been updated (-1) to time up. If it is determined that the time is not up (Step A802; No), the small hitting fanfare process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure game processing timer has timed out (step A802; Yes), the small hitting process 2 transition setting process is performed (step A803), and the small hitting fanfare process is terminated. Incidentally, in the case of the present embodiment, in the above-described special figure game process (see FIG. 12), in the game branching process corresponding to the game process number in step A6, the small hitting process with the process number “9” is related to the small hitting process. The process (step A16) and the small hitting middle process 2 (step A17) with the process number “10” are distributed. Therefore, in step A803 of the small hitting fanfare medium process, a transition setting process for shifting to either the small hitting medium process or the small hitting medium process 2 is performed. This is called setting processing. The details of the small hitting / measuring 2 transition setting process will be described later.

[Processing during small hits]
As shown in FIG. 41, in the special hit game process (see FIG. 12) in the special figure game process (see FIG. 12) of the present embodiment, first, the special figure game process timer has already expired, or the special figure After updating the game processing timer (-1), it is checked whether the time is up (step A901). If it is determined that the time is up (step A902; Yes), a small hit remaining ball processing transition setting process is performed ( Step A903), the small hitting / medium processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure game processing timer has not timed up (step A902; No), a normal high probability transition lottery process is performed (step A904), and the small hitting process is terminated. The usual high probability transition lottery process in step A904 is the same as the usual high probability transition lottery process (see FIG. 31) in step A522 in the above-described fanfare / interval process (see FIG. 30).
By this process, the usual high probability lottery is performed in the small special game state after the small hit.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
As shown in FIG. 42, in the small hit remaining ball process transition setting process in the small hit middle process described above, first, “11” is set as the process number (step A911), and this process number is designated as the RWM special game process. Save in the number area (step A912). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time is set (step A913), and the set small hit remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A914). Then, the OFF data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the small hit remaining ball process transition setting process is terminated.

  It should be noted that the ordinary high-probability transition lottery may be performed after the 2R big hit, so that the normal high-probability transition lottery may be performed regardless of whether the 2R big hit or the small hit is won.

[Small hit processing 2 transition setting processing]
In the small hitting fanfare middle process (see FIG. 40) described above, in the small hitting medium process 2 transition setting process (step A803), first, as shown in FIG. This processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area of the RWM (step A921). Then, an opening time (small hit opening mode (see FIG. 6 (d))) of the big winning opening (open / close door 38c of the special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the small winning pattern is set (step A922) and set. The opened time is saved in the special game process timer area (step A923). Then, a signal related to opening of the big winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step A924), and ON data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step A925). Then, the number of winning prizes is reset (step A926), and the small hit middle process 2 transition setting process is terminated.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, the small hit end process (step A19) in the special figure game process (see FIG. 12) of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 44, in the small hit end processing, first, it is determined whether or not a specific small hit (that is, the small hit in FIG. 2 in the normal gaming state) has ended (step A931). Here, if it is determined that the specific small hit has ended (step A931; Yes), the value of the number of winnings to the big winning opening during the small hitting period is acquired from the RWM small winning number area (step A932). Then, the mode state of the transfer destination corresponding to the acquired value of the small winning prize is set (step A933). At this time, as a mode state, for example, when the number of winnings is 0, “no change” is the same as before the small hit gaming state occurs, and when the number of winnings is 1 to 3, a specific reach state is a normal game "Specific A reach frequent occurrence mode" as a specific gaming state that occurs with a higher probability than the state, if the number of winnings is 4-5, "specific B reach frequent occurrence mode" as the specific gaming state, 6 or more winnings In this case, one of the “specific C reach frequent occurrence mode” (see FIG. 6E)) as the specific gaming state is set.

  Then, an initial value corresponding to the value of the small winning prize is set in the mode stay frequency area (step A934), a mode change flag is set (step A935), and the probability corresponding to the value of the small winning prize is set. An information command (including mode information) is prepared (step A936), and command setting processing is performed (step A937), whereby a probability information command including mode information corresponding to the value of the number of small winning prizes is given to the effect control device 300 side. Send to. Subsequently, the small winning prize amount area is cleared to 0 (step A938), hold re-determination processing is performed (step A939), special figure normal processing transition setting processing 3 is performed (step A940), and the small hitting end processing is ended. To do. The details of the pending redetermination process (step A939) and the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A940) will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A931 that the specific small hit has not ended (step A931; No), the process proceeds to step A940, and the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is performed (step A940). The hit end process ends.
This process does not change the probability state due to the small hit after the small hit, but the mode state changed according to the number of winnings to the big winning opening opened by the small hit occurs. By transmitting a command indicating the changed mode state to the effect control device 300 side, an effect corresponding to the changed mode state is executed.

[Pending re-judgment processing]
In the hold redetermination process (step A939) in the above-described small hit end process (see FIG. 44), as shown in FIG. 45, it is first checked whether it is a redeterminable timing (step A951), and the redeterminable timing is possible. If it is not (Step A952; No), the hold redetermination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a redeterminable timing (step A952; Yes), the reserved storage area is checked (step A953), and it is determined whether or not the redeterminable pending number is 0 (step A953). A954). In this process, the current mode state and the mode state at the time of determination of holding are not taken into consideration, and re-determination is performed based on the mode state that is the transition destination when finishing the small hit. If it is determined that the re-determinable number of holds is 0 (step A954; Yes), the hold redetermination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the re-determinable number of holds is not 0 (step A954; No), information related to hold that can be pre-readed is acquired (step A955), and special figure hold information re-determination processing is performed (step A956). ), The pending redetermination process is terminated.
By this process, at the end of a specific small hit (only when the big winning opening is in the open mode B, or all the small wins in the normal gaming state may be targeted), according to the winning number information at the small hit Then, the transfer destination mode state is set, and the existing hold re-determination is performed based on the distribution of the transfer destination mode state. As a result, depending on the mode state of the transfer destination, it is possible to change the mode such that the off-hold is quickly changed to the specific reach hold. It should be noted that, instead of at the end of a specific small hit, instead of at the start of the first fluctuation after the end of a specific small hit, the change may be re-determined together with the suspension to be started.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 3]
In the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A940) in the above-described small hit end process (see FIG. 44), as shown in FIG. 46, first, “0” is set as the process number (step A961). The number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A962). Then, a signal related to the end of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A963), and a signal related to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A964). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big prize opening 1 fraud monitoring period flag area holding the big prize opening fraud monitoring period flag (step A965), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big prize opening 2 fraud monitoring period flag area. Is saved (step A966). Then, the information of the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is reset (step A967), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is terminated.

  Here, as the big prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area holding the big prize opening fraud monitoring period flag, a big prize opening 1 fraud monitoring period flag area and a big prize opening 2 fraud monitoring period flag area are provided, The case where the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the corresponding step A965 or A966 has been described. Here, it is conceivable that the large winning award (special variable winning device 38) is provided at only one place as described above and at two places (details will be described in the second embodiment described later). In other words, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is not limited to providing a single prize opening in one place, and may be provided in two places. In other words, the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 described here corresponds to the case where two special winning openings are provided. As described above, when there is one special winning opening, The steps A965 and A966 may be integrated to perform processing for saving the fraud monitoring period flag in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area.

[Special figure hold information re-judgment process]
Next, the special figure hold information redetermination process (step A956) in the above-mentioned hold redetermination process (see FIG. 45) will be described. As shown in FIG. 47, in the special figure hold information re-determination process of this embodiment, steps A141 and A142 are omitted, the processes of steps A160a and A161a are added after step A159, and the process of step A163a is added after step A162. This is different from the above-described special figure hold information determination process (see FIG. 16). Specifically, in this process, first, a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in a jackpot (special game state) is performed (step A143), and the subsequent processes are referred to as the above-described special figure hold information determination process. Do the same. Then, after the process of step A159, a start opening winning effect command (MODE: game result information) that is a redetermination command corresponding to the first half variation number is calculated and prepared (step A160a), and the second half variation number value is redetermined. It is prepared as a start opening prize effect command (ACTION: game result information) which is a command (step A161a), and a command setting process is performed (step A162). Subsequently, a start opening winning prize command command (game result information) as a redetermination effect symbol command is loaded and prepared from the winning effect symbol command area (step A163a), and command setting processing is performed (step A164). The hold information re-determination process ends.

[Normal game processing]
Next, the general game process (step S59) in the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11) will be described.
In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the whole process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, and the display of the usual figure is set.

  As shown in FIG. 48, in the usual game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a is performed (step B1). Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later. Next, a public power prize winning switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is performed (step B2). Then, a process for setting a general game game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to a process corresponding to the general game process number is performed in the register (step B3), and the general game process number corresponding to the general game process number is used by using the table. A process for acquiring the branch address of the process is performed (step B4). Then, a process for saving the return address after the end of the branch process to the stack area is performed (step B5), and then a game branch process is performed according to the game process number (step B6).

  If the game process number is “0” in step B6, the fluctuation start of the normal fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the normal fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, and the normal figure fluctuation processing are performed. A usual process for setting information necessary for the execution is performed (step B7). Details of this ordinary processing will be described later. If the game process number is “1” in step B6, a process for changing the normal map for setting information necessary for performing the process for displaying the normal map is performed (step B8). Details of the process during the normal map change will be described later.

  If the game process number is “2” in step B6, if the result of the normal variation display game is a big hit, the public power release depending on whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is supported A process for displaying a normal diagram for setting time and setting information necessary for performing the process for a normal map (step B9 for performing). Details of this normal map display processing will be described later. In step B6, if the game process number is “3”, the process for the normal map is performed for continuation of the process for the normal map or for setting information necessary for performing the baseball remaining ball process. Perform (Step B10).

If the game process number is “4” in step B6, the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process for setting information necessary for the end process per ordinary map is performed (step B11). If the game process number is “5” in step B6, a normal figure end process is performed (step B12) for setting information necessary for performing the normal figure normal process (step B9).
After that, various tables for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 53 are prepared (step B13), and the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the universal symbol display 53 is performed (step B13). B14), the usual game process is terminated.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described ordinary game process (see FIG. 48) will be described.
As shown in FIG. 49, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is checked whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101), and when it is determined that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B102; No). Ends the gate switch monitoring process. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is an input to the gate switch 34a (Step B102; Yes), the number of common map holds is acquired and it is checked whether or not the number of common map holds is less than the upper limit (Step B103).

  Here, when it is determined that the number of reserved maps is not less than the upper limit value, that is, the upper limit value (step B104; No), the gate switch monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved maps is less than the upper limit (step B104; Yes), a process of updating (+1) the number of reserved maps is performed (step B105). Thereafter, a process of calculating the address of the random number save area corresponding to the updated number of pending reservations is performed (step B106), and the acquired winning random number is saved in the random number save area of the RWM (step B107). The gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the usual figure usual process (step B7) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process (refer FIG. 48) is demonstrated.
As shown in FIG. 50, in the usual-day routine processing, first, it is checked whether or not the number of pending-order holds is 0 (step B201), and when it is determined that the number of pending-order holds is 0 (step B202; Yes) performs the normal figure normal process transition setting process (step B203), and ends the normal figure normal process. In the normal figure normal process transition setting process of step B203, a flag (0) relating to the normal figure normal process, a flag that specifies the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 (in the table for transition to the normal figure normal process) ( The processing for setting general fraud monitoring information) is performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step B202 that the number of ordinary drawings on hold is not 0 (step B202; No), a determination process for ordinary drawings is performed (step B204). Details of the normal hit determination process will be described later. Then, the random number saving area is cleared to 0 (step B205), the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol region (step B206), and the signal corresponding to the universal symbol stop symbol number is sent to the test signal output data region (Step B207). Then, the hit random number save area is shifted (step B208), and the free area after the shift is cleared (step B209). Then, the number of ordinary maps held is updated by -1 (step B210), and the variation time when there is no ordinary power support (first variation time: 30 seconds) is set (step B211).

  Next, a process for determining whether or not a normal power support state has occurred is performed (step B212). Here, if it determines with it being a general electric power support state (step B212; Yes), a stop symbol number will be acquired (step B213). And the fluctuation time (2nd fluctuation time: 2 second) at the time of corresponding normal electric power support is set (step B214), and it transfers to step B215. On the other hand, if it determines with it not being in a general power support state (step B212; No), it will transfer to step B215.

  In step B215, the variation time set in step B211 or step B214 is saved in the usual game process timer. Thereafter, a process transition setting process during a normal map change is performed (step B216), and the normal map normal process is terminated. In the process of step B216, the process number “1” relating to the process of changing the normal map, the test signal relating to the change of the normal map, the normal map in the general map display 53 are displayed in the table for shifting to the process of changing the normal map. A process for setting information for controlling the variable display game (for example, a flag related to the fluctuation of the general-purpose display 53, an initial value of a timer of a blinking period of the general-purpose display 53, etc.) is performed.

[Judgment processing per ordinary figure]
Next, the universal hit determination process (step B204) in the above-described normal figure normal process (see FIG. 50) will be described.
As shown in FIG. 51, in the normal symbol hit determination process, first, deviation information is saved in the hit flag area (step B221), and the stop symbol number at the time of deviation is set in the normal symbol stop symbol (step B222). Then, the normal state probability state is determined (step B223), and if it is determined that the state is a high probability state (step B223; Yes), the lower limit determination value at the time of the normal state high probability is set (step B224). Then, a random number value is loaded and prepared from the random number saving area (step B225), and it is checked whether the random number value is less than the lower limit judgment value (step B226). Here, when it is determined that the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step B227; Yes), the normal hit determination process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not less than the lower limit determination value, that is, is equal to or higher than the lower limit determination value (step B227; No), the upper limit determination value at the time of normal high probability is set (step B228).

  Then, it is checked whether the value of the hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step B229). Here, when it is determined that the value of the hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step B230; Yes), the normal hit determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not larger than the upper limit determination value, that is, it is equal to or less than the upper limit determination value (step B230; No), it is checked whether the value of the hit random number corresponds to the short open (step B231) If it is determined that the value corresponds to the release (step B232; Yes), the hit information including the short release time information is saved in the hit flag area (step B233). And the stop symbol number at the time of a hit is set to a usual figure stop symbol (step B234), and a common symbol hit determination process is complete | finished. On the other hand, if it is determined in step B232 that the value does not correspond to the short release (step B232; No), the hit information including the long release time information is saved in the hit flag area (step B235), and the processing after step 234 is performed. .

If it is determined in step B223 that the normal state probability state is not a high probability state (step B223; No), an upper limit determination value at the time of the normal figure low probability is set (step B236). Then, a winning random number is loaded and prepared from the random number saving area (step B237), and it is checked whether the winning random number value matches the determination value (step B238). Here, when it is determined that the value of the hit random number does not match the determination value (step B239; No), the normal hit determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it matches the determination value (step B239; Yes), the hit information is saved in the random number save area (step B240), and the stop symbol number at the time of hit is set in the normal stop symbol (step B241). ), The process for determining the hit per common map is terminated.
That is, the game control device 100 functions as a determination unit that determines whether or not the winning easy state is generated by the winning easy state generating unit based on a predetermined lottery probability.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the process of changing the usual figure (step B8) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process (see FIG. 48) will be described.
As shown in FIG. 52, in the process of changing the normal figure, first, “1” is set as the process number (step B301), and this process number is saved in the normal game process number area of the RWM (step B302). Then, the corresponding general map display time is set (step B303), and the normal map display time is saved in the general game processing timer area (step B304), and then a signal related to the end of the normal map change is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step B305). Then, a stop flag is saved in the usual figure fluctuation control flag area (step B306), and the usual figure fluctuation process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, a process for displaying a general map (step B9) in the above-described general game process (see FIG. 48) will be described.
As shown in FIG. 53, in the process of displaying a normal map, first, the hit flag set in the normal process (see FIG. 50) is loaded (step B401), and the process of clearing the hit flag area of the RWM is performed. Perform (step B402). Then, it is checked whether or not the loaded hit flag is hit (step B403), and if it is determined that the hit flag is not hit (step B404; No), a normal process transition setting process 1 is performed (step B403). B405), the process for displaying the normal map is terminated. In the process of step 405, the processing number “0” related to the normal chart normal process and the flag for specifying the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 (the normal chart fraud monitoring information) are included in the table for shifting to the normal chart normal process. Etc. are set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step B404 that the hit flag is a win (step B404; Yes), a process for determining whether or not the normal power support state is occurring is performed (step B406). Here, if it is determined that the normal power support state is occurring (step B406; Yes), a process of setting a normal power open time (for example, 5.8 seconds) at the time of the general power support is performed (step B407). Then, the process proceeds to step B409.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step B406 that the ordinary power support state has not occurred (step B406; No), the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state (the state without the ordinary power support). After performing the process of setting the open time for public power (for example, 0.6 seconds) (step B408), the process proceeds to step B409. In other words, the game control device 100 has a normal state in which the starting prize-winning device is in a guided state for the first time and a winning facilitating state in which the starting winning device is in the guided state for a second time longer than the first time. This means that it can function as an easy-to-win winning state generating means.

  In the process of Step B409, after saving the normal power open time (for example, 0.6 seconds or 5.8 seconds) set in Step B407 or Step B408 in the normal game processing timer, The middle process transition setting process is performed (step B410), and the normal chart display process is terminated. In the process of step B410, a table for performing the process transition setting process for the normal figure, a signal for controlling the opening of the normal variation winning device 37, the process number “3” for the normal process for the normal figure, The test signal relating to the operation of the normal variation winning device 37, the control signal relating to the driving of the electric solenoid 37c for opening the normal variation winning device 37, the signal relating to the clearing of the number of winnings to the ordinary variation winning device 37, A signal related to clearing the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 during the ordinary power fraud monitoring period, a flag (normal figure fraud monitoring information) that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37, and the like are set.

[1st scene control processing]
Next, the 1st scene control process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 54, in the 1st scene control process, it is first determined whether or not the test mode is in effect (step C51), and if it is determined that the test mode is in effect (step C51; Yes), the 1st scene control process is performed. Exit. On the other hand, when it is determined that the test mode is not being executed (step C51; No), it is determined whether or not a scene change command has been received (step C52). Here, the scene change commands are various commands related to the game transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300.

  If it is determined in step C52 that the scene change command has been received (step C52; Yes), the game state to be updated (current game state) is acquired (step C53), and the current scene change command received is received. It is determined whether or not the game state is effective (step C54). If it is determined that the command is valid (step C54; Yes), the received command is saved (step C55), and an effect request flag indicating that it is time to change the scene is set (step C56). ), Branch processing (step C57) based on the command identifier of the received command is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step C52 that no scene change command has been received (step C52; No), or if it is determined in step C54 that the command is not valid (step C54; No), step C57 is performed. The process is shifted to and branch processing is performed based on the command identifier of the received command. In this case, branching is performed based on the identifier of the most recent valid command.

  In the branch process based on the command identifier (step C57), a process to be executed based on the received command is selected. Specifically, when a “power-on command” is received, a power-on process (step C58) for performing a process necessary when the power is turned on is performed. If a “power failure recovery command” is received, a power failure recovery (other than waiting for a customer) process (step C59) is performed to perform processing necessary when the power failure is recovered. On the other hand, when the “customer waiting demonstration command” is received, a customer waiting process (step C60) for performing a process related to the display of the customer waiting demo is performed.

  When the “variation pattern command” is received, a mid-fluctuation process (step C61) for performing processing related to the execution of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed. In this changing process (step C61), information necessary for playing the decorative special figure changing display game is set. In the setting of information necessary for playing this decoration special figure variation display game, for example, information included in the “variation pattern command” transmitted from the game control device 100 (whether it is a big hit, mode information, variation pattern information, etc.) ) Based on (), setting of production (variation pattern, variation time, etc.), number of times of changing to a specific gaming state, etc. . The details of the variation number management process will be described later.

  When the “fanfare command” is received, the fanfare processing (step C62), which is processing related to the start of the special gaming state, is performed. Further, when the “large entry / release n-th command” is received, a mid-round process (step C63), which is a process related to a round game, is performed. When an “interval command” is received, an interval process (step C64) that is a process related to an interval between rounds is performed. If an “ending command” is received, an ending process (step C65), which is a process related to the end of the special gaming state, is performed.

  After performing each of the above-described processes selected by the branch process based on the command identifier (step C57), a process based on a command that is not immediately reflected in the video is performed. As this process, first, a symbol command reception process (step C66) for performing a process based on the “decorative symbol command” including information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol variation display game is performed, and a holding including information regarding increase / decrease of the start memory is performed. A pending number command reception process (step C67) for performing processing based on the number commands (special figure 1 pending number command, special figure 2 pending number command) is performed.

  Further, a prefetch information command (a start opening prize presentation command, a start opening prize presentation design, including a result of a prefetch process for determining the result of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory in advance before the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game, etc. Prefetch command reception processing (step C68) for performing processing based on (command) is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command reception process (step C69) is performed in which a process based on a probability information command (probability information command (low probability, high probability)) including information on the probability state is performed.

  Further, after the probability information command reception process is performed in step C69, a re-determination command reception process (step C70) is performed in which a process based on the re-determination command including information regarding the redetermination is performed. Thereafter, a small winning prize number command reception process (step C71) is performed for performing processing based on the small winning prize number command including information on the winning number in the small hit, and the scene control process is terminated.

[Probability information command reception processing]
Next, the probability information command reception process (step C69) in the first scene control process (see FIG. 54) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 55, in the probability information command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not a probability information command has been received (step C401). If it is determined that the probability information command has not been received (step C401; No), the probability information command reception process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability information command has been received (step C401; Yes), the probability information (low probability, high probability, etc.) based on the received probability information command is saved in the corresponding probability information storage area (step C402), it is determined whether or not the gaming state has changed (step C403). In step C403, the probability information based on the received probability information command is compared with the probability information in the current probability state to determine whether there is a change. In other words, in the gaming state in the mode transition destination after the end of the special gaming state (for example, the gaming state in the mode transition destination after the second special gaming state (small hit)), the probability state changed from the current probability state It is determined whether or not.

If it is determined in step C403 that there is no change in the gaming state (step C403; No), the probability information command reception process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a change in the gaming state (step C403; Yes), information regarding the change to the effect state corresponding to the probability information based on the received probability information command is set (step C404), and this probability The information command reception process ends.
By this processing, when a change occurs in the probability state based on the received probability information command, an effect to change to the effect state corresponding to the changing probability state is set.

[Read-ahead command reception processing]
Next, the prefetch command reception process (step C68) in the first scene control process (see FIG. 54) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 56, in the prefetch command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not a prefetch command has been received (step C501). If it is determined that the prefetch command has not been received (step C501; No), the prefetch command reception process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the prefetch command has been received (step C501; Yes), the prefetch information is saved in the corresponding reserved storage area (step C502), and it is determined whether continuous notice is being executed (step S502). C503).

  If it is determined that continuous notice is being executed (step C503; Yes), the normal hold display is set based on the hold variation pattern information (step C504), and the prefetch command receiving process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuous notice is not being executed (step C503; No), it is determined whether or not the continuous notice can be executed (step C505), and the continuous notice is not possible (step C505). C505; No), that is, when it is determined that continuous notice cannot be executed, the prefetch command receiving process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C505 that continuous notice can be executed (step C505; Yes), information related to the continuous notice is saved in the corresponding reserved storage area (step C506), A special hold display is set based on the hold variation pattern information (step C507), and the prefetch command receiving process is terminated.
When the pre-read command is received by this pre-read command reception process, if the continuous notice is being executed, the normal hold display is set based on the fluctuation pattern information of the hold as usual, and something is not being executed. When such notice is executed, information related to the continuous notice is saved in the corresponding hold storage area, and the display mode of the hold is set to be changed.

  That is, in the gaming machine 10, when the small hit hold in the special figure 2 interrupts during the continuous notice in the special figure 1, the continuous notice in the special figure 1 being executed at this time may be terminated, or temporarily In particular, after the special notice in FIG. 1 is interrupted and the small hit in special figure 2 ends, in the changed mode (that is, the game state shifted by the result in the small hit game state in special figure 2), the interruption The continuous notice of Special Figure 1 may be resumed.

[Re-judgment command reception processing]
Next, the redetermination command reception process (step C70) in the first scene control process (see FIG. 54) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 57, in the redetermination command reception process, it is first determined whether or not a redetermination command has been received (step C601). If it is determined that a redetermination command has not been received (step C601; No), the redetermination command reception process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a redetermination command has been received (step C601; Yes), the prefetch information corresponding to the received redetermination command is saved (overwritten) in the corresponding reserved storage area (step C602), and redetermination is performed. A hold display is set based on the prefetch information of the command (step C603), and the redetermination command reception process is terminated.
With this process, when a redetermination command indicating that the mode has been changed is received earlier, the hold display is set based on the table in the transfer destination mode, and the redetermination command indicating that the hold is redetermined is received. In this case, the hold display is set based on the pre-read information of the received redetermination command.

[Ending process for small hits]
FIG. 58 shows a flowchart of the small hitting ending process. In this small hitting ending process, first, information on the probability information command is acquired (C701), and information on the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) at the time of the small hit is acquired (step C702). ). Then, the specific effect information corresponding to the acquired winning number information and probability information is set (step C703), and the specific variation flag is set (step C704).

  Here, the specific variation flag refers to the production control device 300 managing the number of executions of a special variation display game (special figure variation display game) executed by the game control device 100 for a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 times). For this purpose, the number of games of the special figure variation display game to be executed after the mode is switched is set as a specific variation flag, and the display mode corresponding to the mode of the transition destination is set.

Subsequently, as the stay mode information, a display corresponding to the destination mode is set (step C705), a corresponding variation pattern table is set (step C706), and the small hitting ending process is terminated.
By this processing, when the small win is completed, the effect of the mode corresponding to the number of winning game balls won in the big winning opening opened at the small hit is executed.

[Example 1]
Here, an example of the flow at the time of privilege acquisition in the present embodiment will be described. Here, it is assumed that in the normal gaming state, when the normal power long open is won (that is, when the normal variable winning device 37 is in the winning easy state), the specific gaming state occurs due to the occurrence of the small hit according to FIG. explain. FIG. 59 is a timing chart showing the operation of the gaming machine 10 when the mode shift destination lottery after the small hit is performed, and FIG. FIG.
For example, as shown in FIG. 59, when a game ball passes through the general figure start gate 34 in a state where the special figure fluctuation display game according to the special figure 1 is being executed, the general figure fluctuation display game is started (t1). At this time, since the time-short state has not occurred, the execution time of the general-purpose variable display game becomes the long first variable time (30 seconds). At this time, during the special symbol variation display on the display unit 41a of the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 60 (a), the universal diagram variation display game is being executed in the universal game region 41b of the display unit 41a. A message is displayed.

  Here, when a win is made in the usual map change display game, as shown in FIG. 60B, characters such as “Kita!” Indicate that the usual figure change display game is won in the usual game area 41b of the display unit 41a. And the normal variation prize-winning device 37 is in a normal electric long open state (winning easy state) in which the movable members 37b and 37b are opened for a second time longer than the first time (t2). .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59, when a game ball wins in the normal variation winning device 37 (special drawing 2) in the ordinary electric long open state (t3), as shown in FIG. 60 (c), the display device 41 59 is displayed on the display section 41a of FIG. 2, and the change display of the special figure change display game according to the currently executed special figure 1 is stopped (see FIG. 60D). As shown in FIG. 2, the special variation display game based on the suspension of the special figure 2 is preferentially executed (t4). At this time, as shown in FIG. 60 (e), the hold display of the special figure 2 on the display unit 41a of the display device 41 disappears by the execution (digestion) of the special variation display game.

  Then, in the special figure fluctuation display game according to this special figure 2, when a small hit occurs as shown in FIG. 60 (f), as shown in FIG. 60 (g), a special variable winning device 38 as a big prize opening is obtained. The opening / closing door 38c is opened for a predetermined time (3.6 seconds × one time; opening mode B) (t5), and the display unit 41a of the display device 41 is moved to the destination according to the winning mode (here, the number of winnings) during the opening. A mode promotion challenge that promotes the mode of the game is in progress (in this case, characters such as “Place a ball in the attacker and promote the mode!”, And a pattern F that simulates a lottery box for drawing the destination mode) Is displayed. At this time, by displaying the winning counter 41c on the display unit 41a, the player may be notified of the number of winnings in the open big winning opening.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (h), when the number of game balls won as a result of the open special variation winning device 38 is “2” (t6, t7), the number of winning “2” To the specific A reach frequent occurrence mode corresponding to "(! A mode!" Or a pattern F imitating a lottery box from which the character jumps out) is displayed on the display unit 41a of the display device 41. To do. Then, after the small hit in FIG. 2 is over, the gaming state is shifted to the specific A reach frequent occurrence mode (t8).

  In the present embodiment, in the normal game state, the game ball is awarded to the normal variation winning device 37 (starting winning device) in which the winning easy state is generated by the gaming control device 100 as the winning easy state generating means. There may be a plurality of small hits generated by the special variation display game based thereon. In such a case, the following fluctuation frequency management process is performed in the changing process (step C61) in the above-mentioned first scene control process (see FIG. 54).

[Variation frequency management process]
FIG. 61 shows the change frequency management process executed in the changing process (step C61) in the first scene control process (see FIG. 54). In this variation count management process, first, a specification set in order to manage the number of executions of the special figure variation display game executed by the game control device 100 for a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 times) in the effect control device 300. It is checked whether there is a fluctuation flag (step C611). Here, the number of games of the special figure variation display game that is executed after the mode is switched is used as the specific variation flag.

  If it is determined that there is no specific variation flag, that is, there is no specific variation flag (step C612; No), the variation count management process is terminated. When it is determined that there is a specific variation flag, that is, there is a specific variation flag (step C612; Yes), the specific effect count is updated by -1 (step C613), and whether or not the specific effect count is 0. Determination is made (step C614).

  Here, when it is determined that the number of specific effects is not 0 (step C614; No), the process proceeds to step C618. If it is determined that the number of specific effects is 0 (step C614; Yes), the specific effect number area is reset (C615), the specific variation flag is cleared (C616), and the mode state is changed to the normal state ( That is, normal mode information for setting a low probability state (normal gaming state) is set (C617), and the process proceeds to step A618.

In step C618, it is determined whether the time is short. If it is determined that the time is not short (step C618; No), the variation count management process is terminated. When it is determined that the time is short (step C618; Yes), the number of time fluctuations is updated by -1 (step C619), and it is determined whether or not the number of time fluctuations is 0 (step C620). Here, when it is determined that the short-time variation number is not 0 (step C620; No), the variation number management process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of time-varying fluctuations is 0 (step C620; Yes), an effect relating to ending the time-shortening state is set (step C621), the time-shortage flag is cleared (step C622), and the number of fluctuations The management process ends.
With this process, in order to manage the mode state also in the effect control device 300, the number of executions (game number) of the special figure variation display game is managed based on the specific variation flag.

  Next, in the normal gaming state, a special variation display based on the winning of a game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 (starting winning device) in which the winning easy state is generated by the game control device 100 as the winning easy state generating means. An example of a flow when a privilege is acquired in the gaming machine 10 when a plurality of small hits generated by a game occur will be described below. FIG. 62 is a timing chart showing the operation of the gaming machine 10 when performing the mode transition destination lottery after the small hit.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 62, when a game ball passes through the general figure starting gate 34 in a state where the special figure fluctuation display game according to the special figure 1 is being executed, the general figure fluctuation display game is started (t10). . At this time, since the time-short state has not occurred, the execution time of the general-purpose variable display game is a long first variable time (30 seconds). Here, when winning in the normal variation display game, the normal variation winning device 37 opens the movable members 37b and 37b for a second time longer than the first time (a normal power long open state). (T11).

  When a plurality of (for example, three) game balls wins in the normally variable winning device 37 (special figure 2) in the winning easy state (normal electric long open state) (t12, t14, t17), the special figure The special change display game based on the hold of 2 is preferentially executed (t13, t20, t27). That is, the special variation display game t13 of FIG. 2 for the game ball winning t12, the special variation display game t20 of the special diagram 2 for the gaming ball winning t14, and the special illustration for the game ball winning t17. Two special fluctuation display games t27 are executed. At this time, the suspension of special figure 2 is digested one by one every time the special figure fluctuation display game of special figure 2 is executed.

  Then, when a small hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game according to this special figure 2, the special variable prize winning device 38 as a big prize opening opens the opening / closing door 38c for a predetermined time (3.6 seconds × one time; opening mode B). (T15, t21, t28). Then, the gaming state after the end of the small hit is set according to the number of winning game balls to the special variable winning device 38 that is being opened by the small hit.

  At this time, the setting of the gaming state (transition destination mode) after the end of the small hit is set as the special variable winning device opened during the small hit period at each of the above-mentioned multiple hits (t19, t26, t32) May be performed according to the number of winning game balls to 38, or at the timing (t32) when all of the plurality of small hits are completed, the game balls to the special variable winning device 38 released within each small hit period You may perform according to the total number (accumulated number of winnings) of the number of winnings.

  FIG. 63 shows the relationship between the number of game balls won in the special variable winning device 38 released within the small hit period and the transfer destination mode. Here, when the mode state is changed at the end of a plurality of small hits, as shown in FIG. 63A, if the number of winnings is 0, the mode state is not changed and the number of winnings is one. If it is ~ 3, the mode is changed to the specific A reach frequent occurrence mode as mode A, and if the number of winnings is 4 to 5, the mode is changed to the specific B reach frequent occurrence mode as mode B, and the number of winnings is 6 If it is above, it will change to the specific C reach frequent occurrence mode as mode C. Further, when the mode state is changed at the timing when all of the plurality of small wins are completed, as shown in FIG. 63B, if the number of winnings is 0, the mode state is not changed and the number of winnings is If the number is 1 to 5, the mode is changed to mode A (specific A reach frequent occurrence mode), and if the number of wins is 6 to 10, the mode is changed to mode B (specific B reach frequent occurrence mode). If there are 11 or more, the mode is changed to mode C (specific C reach frequent occurrence mode). It goes without saying that the conditions for the number of winnings presented here, the type of the transfer destination mode, and the like can be changed as appropriate.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 62, when the mode state is changed at the end of a plurality of small hits, the special variable winning device 38 opened at the timing t15 by the small hit in the first special figure 2 is applied. Since the number of winning game balls is two (t16, t18), the normal mode is changed to mode B after the small hit (t19). Since the number of winning game balls to the special variable winning device 38 released at the timing of t21 by the small hit in the second special figure 2 is four (t22, t23, t24, t25), this small After the hit is over (t26), the mode A is changed to the mode B. Also, since the number of winning game balls to the special variable winning device 38 released at the timing of t28 by the small hit in the third special figure 2 is three (t29, t30, t31), the small hit ends. Later (t32), the mode B is changed to the mode A.

  In addition, when the mode state is changed at the timing when all of the plurality of small wins are completed, the number of wins to the special variable winning device 38 released by each small hit is 2, 4, or 3, as described above. Therefore, the total number is 9 (in other words, the cumulative number of winnings is 9), and the mode is changed from the normal mode to the mode B after completion of all of the plurality of small wins (t32). In this way, when the mode state is changed at the timing when all of the plurality of small hits are completed, the number of mode transitions is reduced as compared with the case where the mode state is changed at the end of each of the plurality of small hits. Therefore, there is an advantage that the mode transition process can be simplified.

<Modification 1 of the first embodiment>
Further, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state, when there is a big hit in the suspension of the special figure 1, the normal variation winning in which the easy winning state is generated by the game control device 100 as the winning easy state generating means. If the number of winnings in the special variable winning device 38 (large winning mouth) in the small hit period generated by the special variation display game based on the winning of the game ball in the device 37 (starting winning device) is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, You may make it transfer to C mode as a mode state after a small hit. In such a case, the following process is performed in the small hit end process (step A19) in the above-described special figure game process (see FIG. 12).

[Small hit end processing]
As shown in FIG. 64 in which parts corresponding to those in FIG. 44 are assigned the same reference numerals, in the small hit end processing of this modification, steps A931a to A931c, steps A932a and A932b are added after step A931, and step A932 is added. This process is divided into steps A9321 and A9322, and the process of step A935 is omitted, which is different from the process of the above-described embodiment (see FIG. 44).

  That is, in this process, when it is determined in step A931 that the specific small hit (that is, the special figure 2 small hit in the normal gaming state) has ended (step A931; Yes), the special figure 1 hold information is acquired. (Step A931a), it is checked whether there is a big hit (winning of the first special gaming state) in the hold of the special figure 1 based on the obtained hold information of the special figure 1 (step A931b). Here, when it is determined that there is a big hit in the suspension of the special figure 1 (step A931c; Yes), that is, there is a win of the first special gaming state, the current mode state is acquired (step A931d), the value of the number of winnings to the big winning opening during the small hit period is acquired from the RWM small winning number area (step A9321), and the acquired value of the small winning number is a predetermined number (for example, 3 It is determined whether or not (step A932a).

  In Step A932a, when it is determined that the value of the number of winning game balls to the special variable winning device 38 that is being released by a small hit is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (Step A932a; Yes), the C mode (ie, “specific” The processing for setting the “C reach frequent occurrence mode” (see FIG. 63A)) state is performed (step A932b), and a probability information command (including mode information) corresponding to the value of the small winning prize is prepared. (Step A936), and the subsequent processing is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A931c that there is no big win in the suspension of the special figure 1 (step A931c; No), that is, if it is determined that there is no winning in the first special gaming state, The value of the number of winnings to the big winning opening is acquired from the RWM small winning number region (step A9322), and the mode state of the transition destination corresponding to the acquired value of the small winning number is set (step A933). Then, an initial value corresponding to the value of the small winning prize number is set in the mode stay frequency area (step A934), and a probability information command (including mode information) corresponding to the value of the small winning prize number is prepared. (Step A936), the subsequent processing is performed. In Step A932a, if it is determined that the value of the small winning prize number is not equal to or greater than the predetermined number (Step A932a; No), the process proceeds to Step A933, and the subsequent process is performed.

  With this process, when there is a big win in the suspension of the special figure 1, if the number of wins to the big winning opening in the small hit period is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the mode state after the small hit is C mode ( The “specific C reach frequent occurrence mode” (see FIG. 63A)) state is forcibly set.

[Example 2]
Here, an example of the flow at the time of privilege acquisition of this modification will be described. Here, during the continuous notice in which the number of holds in FIG. 1 in the normal gaming state is 3 (of which 1 is the number of big hits held), the ordinary power prize winning device 37 wins the prize. It is assumed that a plurality of small hits according to FIG. FIG. 65 is a schematic diagram showing a display example on the display device 41 when the mode shift destination lottery after the small hit is executed.

  For example, the special figure variation display game is executed in a state in which a special notice is being continuously displayed in a state where the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 3 (of which the number of big hits is 1: target hold), and the game start ball 34 is moved to the game ball. When is passed, the usual figure change display game is started. At this time, since the time-short state has not occurred, the execution time of the general-purpose variable display game is a long first variable time (30 seconds). At this time, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the display unit 41a of the display device 41 indicates that the special symbol 1 is being continuously noticed during the special symbol variation display (for example, characters such as “Maybe ?!”). ) Are superimposed and displayed in the general game area 41b of the display unit 41a, indicating that the normal map variable display game is being executed.

  Here, when a win is made in the normal map display game, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), in the general game area 41b of the display unit 41a, the fact that the normal map display game has been won (for example, “Kita! And the normal variation prize-winning device 37 opens the movable members 37b, 37b for a second time longer than the first time (a normal power long open state). Become.

  Then, when a plurality (for example, three) of game balls wins in the normal variation winning device 37 (special figure 2) in the winning easy state (normal electric long open state), as shown in FIG. 65 (c). After displaying that three suspensions of the special figure 2 have occurred on the display unit 41a of the display device 41 and the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation display game by the special figure 1 being executed is stopped (see FIG. 65 (d)). ), The special figure variation display game based on the suspension of the special figure 2 is executed with priority. At this time, as shown in FIG. 65 (e), the hold display of the special figure 2 on the display unit 41a of the display device 41 disappears one by one every time the special figure fluctuation display game of the special figure 2 is executed (digested). .

  In the special figure fluctuation display game according to this special figure 2, when a small hit occurs (see FIG. 65 (f)), as shown in FIG. 65 (g), the special variable prize winning device 38 is opened and closed as a big prize opening. The door 38c is opened for a predetermined time (3.6 seconds × one time; opening mode B), and the transition mode is promoted to the display unit 41a of the display device 41 according to the winning mode (the number of winnings here) during the opening. A message indicating that it is a mode promotion chance time (for example, letters such as “Aim! Jackpot! Mode promotion chance time!”) Or a condition (mission) for realizing mode promotion (for example, “mission Display the characters such as “Insert 3 spheres into the attacker ☆” and a picture that expects mode promotion. At this time, a mission achievement meter 41d indicating the degree of achievement of the mission may be displayed together with these indications, so that the player's sense of expectation for mission execution may be enhanced.

  Basically, the player's sense of expectation increases in the order of normal mode, A mode, B mode, and C mode. At the time of presentation, the promotion is presented to the C mode.

  After that, when the issued mission (three game balls are won in the special variable winning device 38 (attacker)) is achieved, as shown in FIG. 65 (h), the fact that the mission has been achieved (for example, “ "Mission accomplished !! Characters such as" Intense heat C mode promotion "and a picture that expects mode promotion etc.), and in addition to these displays, for example, an effect image FA that mimics the state of burning fire is displayed The additional display as a background above the part 41a indicates that the reach selection rate is changed to a high probability in the destination mode (in this case, the specific C reach frequent occurrence mode). After that, since a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 (subject hold) that was the subject of the continuous notice, the player's expectation (expectation for promotion of the specific C reach frequent occurrence mode displayed here) is improved. In addition, the reliability of the mode promotion game in the normal gaming state can be improved.

[Example 3]
Next, another example in the flow for acquiring a privilege according to this modification will be described. In this case, in the normal gaming state, when the Phuden Long Open is elected (that is, when the normal variable winning device 37 is in the winning easy state), a plurality of suspensions of special figure 2 are generated. The description will be made assuming that all of the holds in FIG. 2 are small hits. FIG. 66 is a schematic diagram showing a display example on the display device 41 when the mode transition destination lottery after the small hit is executed.

  For example, when the special figure fluctuation display game according to the special figure 1 is executed and the game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 34, the normal figure fluctuation display game is started. At this time, since the time-short state has not occurred, the execution time of the general-purpose variable display game is a long first variable time (30 seconds). At this time, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), the display unit 41a of the display device 41 displays that the special symbol is being fluctuated and is displayed in the normal game area 41b of the display unit 41a. The fact that the variable display game is being executed is displayed.

  Here, when a win is made in the normal map display game, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), in the general game area 41b of the display unit 41a, the fact that the normal map display game has been won (for example, “Kita! And the normal variation prize-winning device 37 opens the movable members 37b, 37b for a second time longer than the first time (a normal power long open state). Become.

  Then, when a plurality (for example, three) of game balls wins in the normal variation winning device 37 (special figure 2) in the winning easy state (the ordinary electric long open state), as shown in FIG. 66 (c). The display unit 41a of the display device 41 displays that three special figure 2 holds have occurred. At this time, it is assumed that the suspensions of the three special figures 2 are all wins as a result of prefetching. Then, after the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation display game according to the special figure 1 being executed is stopped (see FIG. 66 (d)), as shown in FIG. 66 (e), the suspension of the special figure 2 described above (here, The special figure variation display game based on the pre-reading result is preferentially executed with the variation time being uniformly 2 seconds by the special figure 2 small hit in the normal gaming state. At this time, the hold display of the special figure 2 on the display unit 41a of the display device 41 disappears one by one every time the special figure fluctuation display game of the special figure 2 is executed (digested). In addition, the display unit 41a of the display device 41 indicates that the first mission for mode promotion will be performed thereafter (for example, the design F imitating the mission lottery box or the mission “ Characters such as “Kana ~” are displayed.

  Then, in the special figure fluctuation display game according to this special figure 2, when a small hit occurs as a result of the prefetching, as shown in FIG. 66 (f), the open / close door 38c of the special fluctuation prize winning device 38 as the big prize opening is opened. A mode promotion opportunity in which a predetermined time (3.6 seconds × once; release mode B) is opened, and the transition mode is promoted to the display unit 41a of the display device 41 according to the winning mode (the number of winnings here) during the release. An indication of the time (for example, characters such as “Aim! Big hit !! Mode promotion chance time!”) Or a display related to a mission for promoting the mode state after the small hit (eg, “First mission” A! Mode A promotion chance, characters such as “Please put a ball in the attacker ☆” and a picture that expects mode promotion). At this time, a mission achievement meter 41d indicating the degree of achievement of the mission may be displayed together with these indications, so that the player's sense of expectation for mission execution may be enhanced.

  When the issued mission (winning one game ball in the special variable winning device 38 (attacker)) is achieved, as shown in FIG. 66 (g), the fact that the mission has been achieved (for example, “first "Mission accomplished! A mode promotion! Good luck next!" And a picture that expects mode promotion etc.), and in addition to these indications, for example, the state where the flame is burning By additionally displaying the effect image FA as a background below the display unit 41a, the reach selection rate is changed to a high probability in the transfer destination mode (in this case, the specific A reach frequent occurrence mode). At this time, the number of winnings in the mission is displayed on the mission achievement meter 41d in the display unit 41a of the display device 41 in a level gauge manner. Further, the hold display of the special figure 2 on the display unit 41a of the display device 41 disappears by execution of the special figure fluctuation display game according to the next special figure 2.

  When the special figure variation display game based on the hold of the next special figure 2 is executed, as shown in FIG. 67 (a), the display unit 41a of the display device 41 will subsequently receive a mode promotion. (For example, the design F imitating the mission lottery box and characters such as “What should I do next?” To select the mission) are displayed on these displays. In addition, for example, an effect image FA that reproduces a state in which the flame is on is additionally displayed as a background below the display unit 41a to indicate that the current mode is the specific A reach frequent occurrence mode.

  Then, in the special figure fluctuation display game according to this special figure 2, when a small hit occurs as a result of the prefetching, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), the open / close door 38c of the special fluctuation prize winning device 38 as a big prize opening is opened. A mode promotion opportunity in which a predetermined time (3.6 seconds × once; release mode B) is opened, and the transition mode is promoted to the display unit 41a of the display device 41 according to the winning mode (the number of winnings here) during the release. A message indicating the time (for example, “Aim! Big hit !! Mode promotion chance time!” Or the like) or a display related to a mission for promoting the mode state after the small hit (for example, “second mission” !! Display B mode promotion chance, characters such as “Please put two balls in the attacker ☆” and a picture that expects mode promotion). At this time, a mission achievement meter 41d indicating the degree of achievement of the mission may be displayed together with these indications, so that the player's sense of expectation for mission execution may be enhanced.

Then, when the issued mission (two game balls are won in the special variable winning device 38 (attacker)) is achieved, as shown in FIG. 67 (c), the fact that the mission has been achieved (for example, “second "Mission accomplished! B mode promotion! I'm still going to go!" And a picture that expects further mode promotion etc.), and in addition to these indications, for example, the state that the flame is burning By additionally displaying the produced effect image FA as a background in the approximate center of the display unit 41a, it is indicated that the reach selection rate is changed with high probability in the transition destination mode (in this case, the specific B reach frequent occurrence mode). . At this time, the number of winnings in the mission is displayed on the mission achievement meter 41d in the display unit 41a of the display device 41 in a level gauge manner. Further, the hold display of the special figure 2 on the display unit 41a of the display device 41 disappears by execution of the special figure fluctuation display game according to the next special figure 2.
In this way, in all the off-holds in the special figure 2 hold, if the special figure variation display game is digested by performing a series of effects as shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the player is welcomed. The dissatisfaction of the player when the unsuccessful occurrence occurs can be wiped out.

  Here, based on the suspension of the special figure 2 described above, the following special figure change display game is executed, but as a result of the third mission, the current mode ( Here, whether to maintain the specific B reach frequent occurrence mode) is determined based on the above-described prefetching result.

  For example, when the pre-reading result is off-hold, as shown in FIG. 67 (d), the display unit 41a of the display device 41 has a new (for example, third mission) for mode promotion thereafter. A message indicating that the event will be performed (for example, a pattern F imitating the mission lottery box or a character such as “What should I do next?” For selecting a mission) is displayed, and in addition to these displays, for example, a flame The effect image FA that reproduces the state of burning is additionally displayed as a background in the approximate center of the display unit 41a, indicating that the current mode is the specific B reach frequent occurrence mode. Then, a series of effects similar to those shown in FIGS. 66 (f) to 66 (g) and FIGS. 67 (b) to 67 (c) are performed, and as a result, the current mode ( Here, the specific B reach frequent occurrence mode) is maintained.

  On the other hand, when the pre-reading result is a small hit, a series of effects similar to those shown in FIGS. 66 (e) to 66 (f) and FIGS. 67 (a) to 67 (b) are performed, and the mission is achieved. Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (e), the display unit 41a of the display device 41 displays characters such as “congratulations ☆ C mode entry!” Or C mode promotion on the display unit 41a. In addition to these displays, for example, an effect image FA that mimics a state where the flame is on is additionally displayed as a background above the display unit 41a, so that the mode of the transition destination (in this case) In the specific C reach frequent occurrence mode), the reach selection rate is changed to a high probability. At this time, by displaying the winning counter 41c on the display unit 41a, the player may be notified of the number of winnings in the open big winning opening.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present modified example, when the normal electric game is won to open the ordinary electric long (that is, the normal variable winning device 37 is in the easy-to-win state), the small hit of FIG. In the case where the game has occurred, the game state after the small win (transition destination mode) is promoted stepwise in accordance with the number of winning game balls to the special variable winning device 38 released by the small hit. It should be noted that, depending on the information in the hold in FIG. 2 (hit and miss), for example, if the hold content cannot be expected (such as miss hold), the mode state at that time is maintained and the expected hold content ( If it is a small hit, etc., the mode promotion condition is set with easy conditions (such as a smaller number of winnings to clear the condition), or the mission is issued early to the player. Alternatively, the mode state may be promoted.

[Example 4]
Next, another example in the flow for acquiring a privilege according to this modification will be described. Here, when the normally variable winning device 37 is in an easy-to-win state (that is, when the public electric long open is won), a plurality of suspensions (for example, three) of the special figure 2 occur, and as a result of prefetching, A description will be given assuming that the second hold of the special figure 2 is a big hit. FIG. 68 is a schematic diagram illustrating a display example on the display device 41 when the mode shift destination lottery after the small hit is executed.

  For example, in a state where the special figure fluctuation display game according to the special figure 1 is being executed, a plurality of (for example, for example) the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 (the special figure 2) which is won in the normal figure fluctuation display game and is in the winning easy state, When three (3) game balls are won, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), it is displayed on the display unit 41a of the display device 41 that three suspensions of special figure 2 have occurred, and according to special figure 1 being executed. After the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation display game stops, the special figure fluctuation display game based on the suspension of the special figure 2 is preferentially executed. At this time, it is assumed that, as a result of the prefetching, the second hold is a big hit win in the hold of the three special figures 2. Then, after the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation display game by the running special figure 1 is stopped, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the special figure fluctuation display game based on the suspension of the special figure 2 described above is played as a normal game. Special figure 2 at the time of the state is preferentially executed with the variation time being uniformly 2 seconds. At this time, the hold display of the special figure 2 on the display unit 41a of the display device 41 disappears one by one every time the special figure fluctuation display game of the special figure 2 is executed (digested).

  In the special figure fluctuation display game according to this special figure 2, when a small hit occurs, as shown in FIG. 68 (c), the open / close door 38c of the special variable prize winning device 38 as a big prize opening is kept for a predetermined time (3. 6 seconds × 1 time; release mode B) As shown in FIG. 68 (d), the display unit 41 a of the display device 41 has a transition destination mode depending on the winning mode (in this case, the number of winnings) during the release. A message indicating that it is a mode promotion chance time to be promoted (for example, characters such as “Aim! Big hit !! Mode promotion chance time!”) Or a display related to a mission for promoting the mode state after a small hit (for example, , “Make a mission !! Put three balls in the attacker ☆” and display a picture that expects mode promotion).

  Basically, the player's sense of expectation increases in the order of normal mode, A mode, B mode, and C mode. At the time of presentation, the promotion is presented to the C mode.

  Then, when the issued mission (three game balls are won in the special variable prize winning device 38 (attacker)) is achieved, as shown in FIG. In addition to these characters, for example, a design image FA that reproduces a state where the flame is burning is displayed on the display unit. The additional display as a background above 41a indicates that the reach selection rate is changed to a high probability in the transfer destination mode (in this case, the specific C reach frequent occurrence mode). And as shown in FIG.68 (f), when the special figure fluctuation display game by the following special figure 2 (namely, the 2nd holding | maintenance whose look-ahead result was a big hit) is performed, the display part of the display apparatus 41 will be displayed. In the special figure 2 hold display at 41a, one disappears by execution of the special figure variation display game based on the hold of the second special figure 2 in which the prefetching result was a big hit, and a big hit occurs as a final result.

  By doing this, it is possible to give the player a feeling that a big hit has occurred by entering the C mode, and that the mode transition from the normal will not have a sense of expectation if it is only a presentation. By preventing the player from actively switching to the mode, the player can launch the game ball without stopping even during the opening of the big winning opening due to the small hit. It will also prevent the decline in operation.

  In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, when the small hits in the special figure 2 are continuously generated (multiple occurrences), the special variable winning device 38 (big winning opening) is not immediately opened, When the special figure variation display by the last small hit that has occurred is completed, the big winning opening may be opened collectively, and the mode transition destination may be determined based on the number of winnings at this time.

  In addition, when one ordinary variable winning device 37 is opened, there are four holds, and when all four holds are displayed with a two-second variation display with a small hit in the special figure 2 at the normal time, Even if the opening mode B (3.6 seconds × 1 time) is opened 4 times (that is, 3.6 seconds × 4 times), the normal diagram change time is 30 seconds. Even if the display game is won, it does not occur continuously, but it does not necessarily need to be uniformly 2 seconds, and any time value that does not occur continuously can be set as appropriate.

  Also, when the special figure fluctuation display game that is currently fluctuating is about to end and the special figure fluctuation display game according to the following special figure 2 is started while the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is awarded, that is, It is also conceivable that the number of winnings in the opening of the normal variable winning device 37 cannot be grasped at the start of the special figure changing display game by the first hold. In this case, if there is a big hit at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game due to the first hold, the target is the big hit hold, and when the big hit hold occurs after the special figure fluctuation display game due to the first hold starts, What is necessary is just to perform a continuous notice effect from the next special figure fluctuation display game.

  In the present embodiment, the opening period during which the normal variation winning device 37 is opened and the variation display time of the special diagram variation display game according to the special diagram 2 in the normal gaming state are set to be the same, and after the first winning, The specification is such that the next fluctuation does not start until the variable winning device 37 is closed, and the winning number information is referred to when the normal variable winning device 37 is closed, and the number of winnings in the small hit based on the winning number information is handled. Then, the mode state to be finally shifted may be determined.

  In addition, after the end of one small hit, the holding state of special figure 2 is referred to, and if there is a subsequent holding of special figure 2, the probability state of the transfer destination is not fixed, and the number of winnings in the next small hit Information is added to the current number-of-winnings information, and when the subsequent special figure 2 is actually reserved, the final shift is made corresponding to the number of winnings in the small hits based on the previous number-of-winnings information. The mode state may be determined.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable display game (variably displaying a plurality of identification information based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area (starting winning port 36) in the gaming area 32 ( A variable display device (display device 41) having a display unit (display unit 41a) capable of displaying a special variable display game), a first state (blocked state) in which a game ball cannot be won, and a game ball can be won A variable winning device that can be converted into the second state (open state) (special variable winning device 38: special electric accessory (special electricity), big prize opening), and the result of the variable display game is a special result. In a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives a predetermined game value to a player by converting the variable prize device to the second state, a game that flows down the game area in the start prize area Invite the ball to the start prize area A start winning device (ordinary variable winning device 37: normal electric accessory (general power)) that can be converted into a guiding state (open state) to perform and a non-inducting state (non-opening state) not to be guided is provided. The gaming state includes a first special gaming state (big hit) and a second special gaming state (small hit) that has a lower gaming value given to the player than the first special gaming state. The game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of controlling the execution, the game state control means (CPU 111A of the game control device 100) capable of controlling the game state in the gaming machine, and the start winning device over the first time. An easy-to-win state generating means (game control device) capable of generating an easy-to-win state (normal electric power support state, normal electric long open state) for an inductive state for a second time longer than the normal state to be in an inductive state 00), and the game state control means controls the game state to the start winning device in which the winning easy state is generated by the winning easy state generating means when the gaming state is controlled as the normal gaming state. When the second special gaming state is generated by the variable display game based on the winning, when the second special gaming state is generated, the second special gaming state is determined according to the winning state of the game ball to the variable winning device converted to the second state. 2. The game state after the end of the special game state can be controlled.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game state control means (CPU 111A) is controlled by the winning easy state generating means (game control device 100) while controlling the game state as the normal game state. When the second special gaming state (small win) is generated by the special variation display game based on the winning (special figure 2 winning) of the game ball to the starting winning device (ordinary variable winning device 37) in which the winning easy state is generated When the small hit is generated, the gaming state after the small hit is made controllable according to the winning mode of the game ball to the variable winning device (special variable winning device 38) converted to the second state. This increases the player's expectation that the easy-to-win state will occur in the normal gaming state (that is, the open state of the normal variable winning device 37), and as a result, will further enhance the interest of the game. It can be.

  In addition, when a second special game state (small hit) having a game value lower than that of the first special game state (big hit) is generated, the winning mode (winning) of the game ball to the special variable winning device 38 converted to the second state The game state after the end of the small hit is controlled by the number, the winning timing, etc.), so that the player can provide a new gameability such as setting the game state himself, and the player with low value It is possible to dispel the dissatisfaction of the player when a small hit that is not welcomed occurs.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled as the normal gaming state by the gaming state control means (CPU 111A), the winning easy state generating means (game control device 100) has a predetermined probability. An easy-to-win state is generated, and the game execution control means (game control device 100) causes the start winning device (ordinary variable winning device 37) in which the easy-to-win state is generated by the easy-to-win state generating means (game control device 100). ) With a higher probability than the special variation display game based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area (start winning port 36) where the winning easy state has not occurred. When the second special game state (small hit) is generated and the game execution control means generates the second special game state, the game state control means generates the second special game state. When the state occurs, the gaming state after the end of the second special gaming state can be controlled according to the number of winning game balls to the variable winning device (special variable winning device 38) converted to the second state. good.

  In this case, an easy winning state in which the open state in the normal variable winning device 37 is longer than normal is generated with a predetermined probability by the easy winning state generating means (game control device 100), so that the winning in the normal gaming state. It is possible to increase the player's expectation that the easy state will occur. When the game execution control means (game control device 100) does not generate the winning easy state in the special variation display game by the normal variation winning device 37 in the winning facilitated state, that is, the game to the start winning opening 36. Since a small win is generated with a higher probability than a special variation display game based on a winning of a ball, if the winning easy state occurs, it becomes a very desirable situation for the player that the occurrence frequency of the small winning is increased. Can be further increased. Furthermore, since the game state control means (CPU 111A) controls the game state after the end of the small hit by the number of winning game balls to the special variable winning device 38, a new game characteristic in which the player himself sets the game state. The expectation for can be further increased.

  Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the gaming state control means (CPU 111A) has a plurality of special gaming states (specific A) in which a specific reach state is generated with a higher probability than a normal gaming state as a controllable gaming state. Reach frequent occurrence mode, specific B reach frequent occurrence mode, specific C reach frequent occurrence mode), and when a small hit (second special game state) occurs, the game ball wins to the special variable winning device 38 converted to the second state Based on the number, it may be possible to control which special gaming state among a plurality of special gaming states the gaming state after the end of the small hit is made.

  In this way, when the normally variable winning device 37 is set to the easy-to-win state in the normal gaming state, the special variable winning device 38 converted to the second state is triggered by the occurrence of the small hit. Among a plurality of special gaming states (specific A reach multi-occurrence mode, specific B reach multi-occurrence mode, specific C reach multi-occurrence mode) in which a specific reach state occurs with a higher probability than a normal game state in accordance with the number of winning game balls Any of the above will be generated as the gaming state after the end of the small hit, so it is possible to increase the interest in the small hit (second special gaming state) that is not welcomed by the player and dispels the dissatisfaction of the player Can do.

In addition, as the gaming state after the end of the small hit, since the occurrence rate of a specific reach state shifts to a specific gaming state with a high probability, the small hit will serve as a notice of a high probability transition, It can enhance the interest of the game when it is executed.
In addition, since it is possible to expect a high probability of a specific reach state after the end of the small hit according to the number of wins, the player continues to hit the game ball and can prevent the stop.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game state control means (CPU 111A) facilitates winning by the winning easy state generating means (game control device 100) when the gaming state is controlled as the normal gaming state. When a plurality of small wins are generated by the special variation display game based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 in which the state is generated, the special variable winnings converted to the second state when the plurality of small hits are generated. Based on the cumulative number of winning game balls to the device 38, the gaming state after the plurality of small hits is classified into a plurality of special gaming states (specific A reach multi-occurrence mode, specific B reach multi-occurrence mode, specific C reach multi-occurrence mode). It may be possible to control which of these special gaming states is set.

  Therefore, in the normal gaming state, when the normal variation winning device 37 is set to the winning facilitated state, the special variable winnings converted to the second state at the occurrence of each small hit, triggered by the occurrence of a plurality of small hits. A plurality of special game states (specific A reach multi-occurrence mode, specific B reach multi-occurrence mode, specific C reach) in which a specific reach state occurs with a higher probability than the normal game state in accordance with the cumulative number of game balls won in the device 38. Is generated as a gaming state after completion of the multiple small hits, so that a high reach of a specific reach state after the end of the multiple small hits by aiming to increase the cumulative number of winnings Probability can be expected, and the interest in the small hit (second special game state) that is low in value and not welcomed by the player can be further enhanced.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game state control means (CPU 111A) facilitates winning by the winning easy state generating means (game control device 100) when the gaming state is controlled as the normal gaming state. When a plurality of small hits are generated by a special variation display game based on winning of a game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 in which the state is generated, a special state that is converted to the second state each time the plurality of small hits are generated Based on the number of winning game balls to the variable winning device 38, the gaming state after the plurality of small hits is divided into a plurality of special gaming states (specific A reach multiple occurrence mode, specific B reach multiple occurrence mode, specific C reach multiple occurrence mode). It is possible to control which of the special gaming states is set.

  Therefore, in the normal gaming state, when the normal variation winning device 37 is set to the winning facilitated state, the special variable winnings converted to the second state at the occurrence of each small hit, triggered by the occurrence of a plurality of small hits. A plurality of special game states (specific A reach multi-occurrence mode, specific B reach multi-occurrence mode, specific C reach) in which a specific reach state occurs with a higher probability than the normal game state in accordance with the number of winning game balls to the device 38. Multiple occurrence mode) as a gaming state after the end of each of the plurality of small hits, by aiming to increase the number of wins to the special variable winning device 38 in each small hit, It is possible to expect a high probability of a specific reach state after the small hit. For this reason, the player continues to hit the game ball, can prevent the hitting, and can further enhance the interest in the small hit (second special game state) which is low in value and not welcomed by the player.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game state control means (CPU 111A) facilitates winning by the winning easy state generating means (game control device 100) when the gaming state is controlled as the normal gaming state. When a plurality of small wins are generated by the special variation display game based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 in which the state is generated, the special variable winnings converted to the second state when the plurality of small hits are generated. Based on the cumulative number of winning game balls to the device 38, the gaming state after the end of the last small hit among the plurality of generated small hits is designated as a plurality of special gaming states (specific A reach multiple occurrence mode, specific B reach). It may be possible to control which of the special game states (multiple mode, specific C reach multiple mode) is set.

  Therefore, in the normal gaming state, when the normal variation winning device 37 is set to the winning facilitated state, the special variable winnings converted to the second state at the occurrence of each small hit, triggered by the occurrence of a plurality of small hits. A plurality of special game states (specific A reach multi-occurrence mode, specific B reach multi-occurrence mode, specific C reach) in which a specific reach state occurs with a higher probability than the normal game state in accordance with the cumulative number of game balls won in the device 38. Multiple occurrence mode) is generated as the gaming state after the end of the last hit of the multiple hits, so all of the multiple hits that occurred by aiming to increase the cumulative number of winnings Can be expected to generate a high probability of a specific reach state after the end of the game, so that the player will continue to hit the game ball, can be prevented from stopping, low-value player Interest in unwelcome Koatari (second special game state) can be increased further the.

Second Embodiment
From here, the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described. Hereinafter, the same components as those in the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted, and only differences from the first embodiment will be described.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the open mode of the ordinary train, that is, the open mode of the normal variable winning device 37 as the start winning device is the same as that in the first embodiment, and a plurality of probability states of the special figure (for example, Normal probability state (low probability state), high probability states A and B higher than low probability state, medium probability state lower than high probability state and higher than low probability state), first special gaming state (big hit) As an opportunity, the probability state in the gaming state after the small hit is determined according to the number of winnings at the time of opening of the special variable winning device 38 (big winning opening) in the second special gaming state (small winning) in the normal gaming state. A probability fluctuation state to be changed is generated.

  In other words, in the first embodiment described above, a small win is generated by winning the normal variable winning device 37 in the normal gaming state in which the winning is made easy (normal electric long open state) (the small win in FIG. 2 is generated). ), The mode state after the small hit (the transition destination mode) was changed according to the winning mode (number of winnings) of the game ball won when the big winning opening was opened by the small hit, In the embodiment, the probability state after the small hit is changed according to the winning mode (the number of winnings) of the game ball won when the big winning opening is opened by the small hit. In other words, it differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the control target after the small hit is changed from the mode state to the probability state.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, the special result that can be generated in the special figure variation display game, the small hit end process (step A19) in the special figure game process (see FIG. 12), and the small hit end process (see FIG. 44). ) Hold re-determination process (step A939; see FIG. 45) is different from the above-described first embodiment as follows.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, a prize is awarded to the big prize opening opened by winning the normal variable prize winning device 37 which is in the easy-to-win state (Fuden long open state) (so-called winning by opening the ordinary electric train). As a special result to be generated in such a case, only a big hit or a small hit is generated. Then, a probabilistic advantageous state in a predetermined period (the number of games) is generated according to the number of winning in the big winning opening at the time of the small hit. That is, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a specific game state in a period from the end of the special game state (small hit) until the execution number of the special variable display game reaches a predetermined number of times (details will be described later). Over time, a special figure high probability state can be generated, and when the special figure variation display game is executed a set number of times, the special figure low probability state is returned (having a so-called ST function).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 69, the probability state to be changed after the small hit is a low probability (1/350) state that does not change from the normal probability state when the number of winnings is 0. In the case of 1 to 3, it is promoted to a medium probability (1/250) state (A mode) over 10 games, and in the case of 4 to 5 Promoted to High Probability B (1/100) state (B mode) over 20 games and to High Probability A (1/35) state (C mode) over 30 games Promoted. That is, the upper limit number of times (ST number) of the special figure change display game executed in the probability state promoted according to the number of winnings is also set.

  The number of games after the transition of the probability state is not determined in advance, and for each game, the probability state is changed from a high probability state to a medium probability state or a low probability state (including a high probability A state to a high probability B state), or You may make it perform the fall lottery which determines whether it transfers to a low probability state from a medium probability state. In this case, the probability of the falling lottery may be varied depending on the probability state of the transition. Furthermore, the probability state of transition may be changed according to the big hit symbol, or the number of STs for executing the special figure variation display game in a high probability state may be varied.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, the small hit end process in this embodiment will be described.
As shown in FIG. 70 in which parts corresponding to those in FIG. The process of A934a is added, and the process of step A935 is omitted, which is different from the process of the above-described embodiment (see FIG. 44).

  That is, in this process, after obtaining the value of the number of winnings to the big winning opening in the specific small hit period, which is the small hit of Special Figure 2 in the normal gaming state, from the RWM small hit winning number area in Step A932, The probability state corresponding to the acquired value of the number of small winning prizes and the mode state of the transfer destination are set (step A933a). At this time, see FIG. 69 above for the probability state to be set.

  Then, an initial value corresponding to the value of the number of small winning prizes is set in the probability state staying number area (step A934a), and the subsequent processing is executed in the same manner as the above-described processing to end the small winning end processing. .

  By this processing, after the end of the small hit, the probability state is changed (probability fluctuation) according to the number of winnings to the big winning opening opened by the small hit, and a command indicating the changed probability state is displayed. By transmitting to the effect control device 300 side, an effect corresponding to the changed probability state is executed.

[Special figure hold information re-judgment process]
Next, the special figure hold information redetermination process in the present embodiment will be described.
As shown in FIG. 71 in which parts corresponding to those in FIG. This is different from the above-described special figure hold information redetermination process (see FIG. 47). Specifically, in this process, first, probability state information regarding the set probability state is acquired (step A143a), and a corresponding determination value is set based on the acquired probability information (step A143b). Then, the subsequent processing is executed in the same manner as the above-described processing, and the special figure holding information redetermination processing is terminated.

[Example of production]
Here, an example of the flow at the time of privilege acquisition in the present embodiment will be described. Here, it is assumed that in the normal gaming state, when the normal power long open is won (that is, when the normal variable winning device 37 is in the winning easy state), the specific gaming state occurs due to the occurrence of the small hit according to FIG. explain. FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram illustrating a display example on the display device 41 when the mode shift destination lottery after the small hit is executed.
For example, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), when a game ball passes through the general figure start gate 34 in a state where the special figure change display game according to the special figure 1 is being executed, the general figure change display game is started and displayed. The display unit 41a of the device 41 displays a message indicating that the general-purpose variable display game is being executed in the normal-game game area 41b of the display unit 41a during the special symbol variable display.

  Here, when winning in the usual figure change display game, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the fact that the usual figure change display game has been won in the usual figure game area 41b of the display unit 41a (for example, characters such as Kita!). And the normal variation prize-winning device 37 is in an easy-to-win state (normal electric long open state) in which the movable members 37b and 37b are opened for a second time longer than the first time.

  Then, when the game ball wins the normal variation winning device 37 (special figure 2) in the winning easy state, the special part 2 is held on the display unit 41a of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 72 (c). After one occurrence is displayed and the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation display game by the special figure 1 being executed is stopped (see FIG. 72 (d)), as shown in FIG. 72 (e), the special figure 2 is displayed. The special variation display game based on the suspension of the game is preferentially executed. At this time, the hold display of the special figure 2 on the display unit 41a of the display device 41 disappears by the execution (digestion) of the special variation display game.

  Then, in the special figure fluctuation display game according to this special figure 2, when a small hit occurs as shown in FIG. 72 (f), as shown in FIG. 72 (g), the special variable prize winning device 38 as a big prize opening is obtained. The opening / closing door 38c is opened for a predetermined time (3.6 seconds × one time; opening mode B), and the transition state probability state is determined by the winning mode (here, the number of winnings) in the display unit 41a of the display device 41 during the opening. (In this case, characters such as “Character change gained by putting a ball into an attacker!” And a design F that simulates a probability change lottery box for drawing the probability state of the destination) Is displayed. At this time, by displaying a winning counter (not shown) on the display unit 41a, the player may be notified of the number of winnings to the open big winning opening.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (h), when the number of winning game balls won in the open special variation winning device 38 is "3" as a result, A corresponding to the number of winning "3" The display unit 41a of the display device 41 displays the mode, that is, the effect of shifting to the medium probability state (here, the character of “medium probability!” Or the picture F imitating the lottery box from which the character pops out). Then, after the small hit in the special figure 2 is completed, the probability state is shifted to the medium probability state.

  In the present embodiment, the opening period during which the normal variation winning device 37 is opened and the variation display time of the special diagram variation display game according to the special diagram 2 in the normal gaming state are set to be the same, and after the first winning, The specification is such that the next fluctuation does not start until the variable winning device 37 is closed, and the winning number information is referred to when the normal variable winning device 37 is closed, and the number of winnings in the small hit based on the winning number information is handled. Then, the probability state of the final transition may be determined.

  In addition, after the end of one small hit, the holding state of special figure 2 is referred to, and if there is a subsequent holding of special figure 2, the probability state of the transfer destination is not fixed, and the number of winnings in the next small hit Information is added to the current number-of-winnings information, and when the subsequent special figure 2 is actually reserved, the final shift is made corresponding to the number of winnings in the small hits based on the previous number-of-winnings information. The probability state may be determined.

  As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a variable display game (variably displaying a plurality of identification information based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning area (start winning opening 36) in the game area 32 ( A variable display device (display device 41) having a display unit (display unit 41a) capable of displaying a special variable display game), a first state (blocked state) in which a game ball cannot be won, and a game ball can be won A variable winning device that can be converted into the second state (open state) (special variable winning device 38: special electric accessory (special electricity), big prize opening), and the result of the variable display game is a special result. In a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives a predetermined game value to a player by converting the variable prize device to the second state, a game that flows down the game area in the start prize area Guide the ball to the start winning area A start winning device (ordinary variable winning device 37: ordinary electric utility (general power)) that can be converted into a non-inductive state (non-open state) that is not guided is provided. The gaming state includes a first special gaming state (big hit) and a second special gaming state (small hit) that has a lower gaming value given to the player than the first special gaming state. Game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of controlling execution, probability state control means (game control device 100) capable of controlling a probability state in which a special gaming state occurs in the gaming machine, and a start winning device An easy-to-win state generating means capable of generating an easy-to-win state (general power support state, general electric long open state) that is in an inductive state for a second time longer than a normal state in which the inductive state is in an hour (Game control 100), and the probability state control means is a variable display game based on winning of a game ball to the start winning device in which the winning easy state is generated by the winning easy state generating means in a predetermined probability state. When the second special gaming state occurs, when the second special gaming state occurs, after the second special gaming state ends, according to the winning mode of the game ball to the variable winning device converted to the second state It is possible to control a probability state in which a special gaming state occurs in the game.

  For this reason, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability state control means (game control apparatus 100) is in a state where the probability of occurrence of the special gaming state is a predetermined probability state, The second special gaming state (small) is achieved by a special variation display game based on the winning of a game ball (special figure 2 winning) to the starting winning device (ordinary variable winning device 37) in which the winning easy state is generated by the gaming control device 100). When the small hit occurs, the special game after the small hit ends according to the winning mode of the game ball to the variable winning device (special variable winning device 38) converted to the second state when the small hit occurs. By making the control of the probability state in which the state occurs, the probability of occurrence of the special gaming state is a predetermined probability state, and a winning capacity that facilitates winning of the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 State increase the player's expectation for that occurs, eventually it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

  In addition, when a second special game state (small hit) having a lower game value than the first special game state (big hit) is generated, the game ball is applied to the special variable winning device 38 converted to the second state (open state). Depending on the winning mode (number of winnings, winning timing, etc.), the probability state that a special gaming state will occur after the end of the small hit is controlled, thus providing a new gameability that allows players to set their own gaming state It is possible to eliminate the dissatisfaction of the player when a small hit that is low in value and not welcomed by the player occurs.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state controlled by the probability state control means (game control device 100) is a normal probability state, the winning easy state generating means (game control device 100) In the variable display game based on the winning of a game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 in which the winning control state is generated with a predetermined probability, and the game execution control means (game control device 100) has generated the winning easy state, The probability state control means generates a second special gaming state (small hit) with a higher probability than a variable display game based on winning of a game ball to the start winning opening 36 where no winning easy state has occurred. When the second special game state is generated by the control means, when the second special game state is generated, according to the number of game balls won in the special variable winning device 38 converted to the second state. The special game state after the completion of the second special game state is adapted to be controlled the probability condition occurring.

  Thereby, when the probability state is the normal probability state, the winning ease state (normal electric long open state) of the normal variation winning device 37 is set at a predetermined probability by the game control device 100 (winning easy state generating means). Since it is generated, it is possible to enhance the player's expectation that the winning easy state in the normal probability state occurs. Further, the game control device 100 (game execution control means) in the variable display game by the normal variation winning device 37 in the easy-to-win state is more than the variable display game by the normal variable winning device 37 in the normal state that is not in the easy-to-win state. Since a small win is generated with a high probability, when the easy winning state is generated, it becomes a very desirable situation for the player that the occurrence frequency of the small win is increased, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced. Further, since the game control device 100 (probability state control means) controls the game state after the end of the small hit by the number of winning game balls to the special variable winning device 38, a new game state where the player himself sets the game state. It is possible to further increase the sense of expectation for a new game.

  Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a plurality of probability states as probability states that can be controlled by the game control device 100 (probability state control means), and the second special game state (small) is displayed by a special variation display game in a predetermined period. When a small win occurs, a special gaming state after the end of the predetermined period is generated based on the number of winning game balls to the special variable winning device 38 converted to the second state when the small hit occurs. It is possible to control which of the plurality of probability states is the probability state to be performed.

  As a result, when a small hit occurs due to the variable display game in a predetermined period after the big hit ends, the special variable winning device 38 converted to the second state is triggered by the occurrence of the small hit. Based on the number of winning game balls, the probability state in which a special gaming state occurs after the end of the predetermined period is controlled by any one of a plurality of probability states, so aim to increase the number of winnings Therefore, it can be expected that the probability state in which the special gaming state occurs after the predetermined period ends is shifted to a high probability, and the interest in the small hit that is lower than the big hit and is not welcomed by the player can be further enhanced.

<Third Embodiment>
From here, the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described. Hereinafter, the same components as those in the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted, and only differences from the first embodiment will be described.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the end of the first special gaming state (big hit), the game machine 10 does not immediately shift to the specific gaming state (probability change or short time), and remains in the second special gaming state (small hit) for a predetermined period. A small hit probability change period with an increased probability is provided, and the specific game state (mode state, probability state) of the transition destination is determined based on the winning number information by the small hit in the small hit probability change period.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, a special result that can be generated in the special figure variation display game, the small hit count in the count switch monitoring process (step A2; see FIG. 17) of the special figure game process (see FIG. 12). Update process (step A203; see FIG. 18), fluctuation number update process (step A457) in the special figure display process (see FIG. 26), jackpot end process (step A13; FIG. 33) in the special figure game process (see FIG. 12) Is different from the first embodiment as described below.

  In this embodiment, after the end of the first special game state (big hit), a prize is awarded to the big prize opening opened by winning the normal variable prize winning device 37 which is in the easy-to-win situation (so-called “opening of public power”). As a special result to be generated in the case of winning a prize, for example, a small hit probability change period with an increased probability of the second special gaming state (small hit) is provided for a predetermined period (for example, 10 games), Based on the winning number information, the specific game state (mode state, probability state) of the transfer destination is determined.

  In this embodiment, the probability of generating a small hit (small hit probability) is the same as that in the first embodiment described above in the normal gaming state and the general power support state as shown in FIG. 73 (a). There is a difference from the above-described first embodiment in that it is set to 10/300 in the special figure 1 and 299/300 in the special figure 2 in the small hit probability changing period. In other words, in the small hit probability changing period, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 (start winning prize opening 36) is set to be higher than in the normal gaming state and the ordinary power support state.

  In addition, as a specific gaming state (mode state, probability state) set as a gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state, a prize is awarded to the special variation winning device 38 as a winning mode of the game ball to the special variation winning device 38. When the number of winning game balls is used, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), when the number of winnings is 0 to 3, the probability state (hereinafter simply referred to as the probability state) to be changed after the small hit is It is a low probability state that does not change from before the small hit occurs, the probability at that time is 1/350, the upper limit number of times to execute the special figure variation display game in the normal power support state (hereinafter referred to as the general power support frequency) does not change The mode state is set to the normal mode. When the number of winnings is 4 to 8, the probability state is a medium probability state, and the probability at that time is set to 1/250, the number of general power support is 20 times, and the mode state is set to A mode. When the number of winnings is 9 to 12, the probability state is the high probability B state, the probability at that time is set to 1/100, the number of general power support is 100 times, and the mode state is set to the B mode. If the number of winnings is 15 or more, the probability state is a high probability A state, the probability at that time is 1/35, the number of times of support for ordinary power is until the next special figure variation display game starts, the mode state is C mode Is set.

[Counting update process for small hits]
Next, the small hit count update process of the present embodiment will be described.
As shown in FIG. 74, the parts corresponding to those in FIG. 18 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and in the small hit count updating process of this embodiment, the process of step A212a is added after the process of step A211. This is different from the above-described processing (see FIG. 18). Specifically, in this process, first, when it is determined that there is an input to the count switch 38a (step A211; Yes), it is determined whether or not a small hit probability change period flag as a specific gaming state exists (step A212a). . Here, when it is determined that the small hit probability changing period flag does not exist (step A212a; No), the process proceeds to step A216, and the subsequent processes are executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit probability changing period flag exists (step A212a; Yes), the small winning prize number information is updated by +1 (step A213), and the subsequent processing is executed.
As a result of the above processing, the number of winnings per small hit is counted when the small hit probability changing period is in a state where the small hit is open.

[Variation count update processing]
Next, the fluctuation number update process of this embodiment will be described.
As shown in FIG. 75 in which the same reference numerals are assigned to the parts corresponding to those in FIG. 28, the variation number update process of the present embodiment is the above-described variation number update process (see FIG. 28) is a special figure display process (see FIG. 26). ) In step A455 (see FIG. 27), but is different in that it is step A457 (see FIG. 27) in the special figure display processing (see FIG. 26).

  That is, in this variation number updating process, it is determined in step A452 in the special figure display processing that the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A452; Yes) or the small hit flag 2 is a small hit in step A454. (Step A454; Yes), it is first determined whether the small hit probability change period is in effect, that is, whether there is a small hit probability change period flag (Step A470a). Here, when it is determined that there is no small hit probability change period flag (step A470a; No), the normal number of times update processing is performed (step A471), and then the variation number of times update processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A470a that there is a small hit probability variation period flag (step A470a; Yes), the small hit probability variation variation count is updated by -1 (step A472a), and the small hit probability variation variation count is zero. It is determined whether or not (step A473a). Note that the number of small hit probability variation changes is set as an initial value of the number of executions (for example, 10 times) of the special figure change display game that is a small hit state at the end of the special game state based on the derivation of a predetermined special result mode. .

  Here, when it is determined that the number of small hit probability variation changes is not zero (step A473a; No), that is, in the next special figure variation display game, the small hit probability variation state is also ended. On the other hand, it is determined that the number of small hit probability change fluctuations is 0 (step A473a; Yes), that is, the period for setting the small hit probability change state in this special figure fluctuation display game is ended (the predetermined number of small hits is cleared). ), A signal relating to the end of the small hit probability variation period is saved in the external information output data area (step A474a). Then, a signal relating to the end of the small hit probability change period is saved in the test signal output data area (step A474b), the small hit probability change variation area of the RWM is reset (step A474c), and the small hit probability change period flag is cleared (step A474c). Step A475a).

  Subsequently, information on the number of small winning prizes is acquired (step A476a), and a signal related to the start of the corresponding specific gaming state is saved in the external information output data area based on the acquired information on the number of small winning prizes (step A476b). . Then, based on the acquired small winning prize information, a signal related to the start of the corresponding specific gaming state is saved in the test signal output data area (step A476c), and the probability information command (corresponding specific information is stored in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery). (Game state) is saved (step A476d).

Then, a flag based on the corresponding specific game state information is saved in the normal game mode flag area (step A476e), and a flag based on the corresponding specific game state information is saved in the special game mode flag area (step A476e). A476f) After preparing the probability information command based on the transition probability information (step A477a), the command setting process is performed (step A478), the corresponding variation pattern table is set (step A479), and the variation number updating process is terminated. To do.
By this process, the small hit probability change period is managed by the number of times set based on the stop symbol when the fluctuation is stopped in the special figure display process.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the jackpot end process in the present embodiment will be described.
As shown in FIG. 76 in which parts corresponding to those in FIG. The difference is that step A711a and step A711b are added between A711 and A712.

  That is, in the big hit end processing, a signal related to the start of the small hit probability changing state is saved in the external information output data area (step A721a), and a signal related to the start of the small hit probability changing state is saved in the test signal output data area (step A722a). ). Next, the number at the time of small hit probability change is saved in the game state display number area (step A723a), and the probability information command (small hit probability change) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A726a). Thereafter, a probability information command related to the small hit probability variation state is prepared (step A710a), and command setting processing is performed (step A711). The probability information command is transmitted later to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 sets production contents based on this information.

  Then, the initial value (for example, 10 games) of the small hit probability variation variation number is saved in the small hit probability variation frequency region (step a711a), and a flag related to the small hit probability variation period (small hit probability variation period flag) is saved (step 711a). A711b), a special figure normal process transition setting process is performed (step A712), and the jackpot end process is terminated. Here, the initial value of the small hit probability changing period may be determined so as to differ depending on the big hit symbol, or may be determined by overflow during big hit or passing through a predetermined area. Further, the small hit probability change period may be determined by performing a mission in a predetermined round during the big hit and achieving the mission. And how many games the small hit probability variation period is provided (generated) is saved as an initial value of the number of small hit probability variation.

  By this process, after all the big hits are finished, instead of setting to generate a probability change or a short time, a small hit probability change period of a predetermined period (number of times) is set, and the specific gaming state after the small hit probability change period ends Is determined.

[Example 1]
Here, an example of the flow at the time of privilege acquisition in the present embodiment will be described. Here, in the normal gaming state, when the ordinary electric power long open is won (that is, when the normal variable winning device 37 is in the easy winning state), immediately after the big hit, the specific gaming state (probable change or short time) is entered. There is a small hit probability change period with an increased probability of small hits for a predetermined period (here, 10 games) without transition, and based on the winning number information by the small hits in the small hit probability change period, the specific gaming state of the transition destination Description will be made assuming that (high probability mode state, high probability state) is determined. FIG. 77 is a schematic diagram showing a display example on the display device 41 when the mode transition destination lottery at the end of the big hit is executed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), at the time of big hit ending, the display unit 41a of the display device 41 displays that the big hit is ending. Then, when the small hit probability variation variation for a predetermined period (10 games) set in advance is started, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), the display unit 41a of the display device 41 has the small hit probability variation variation ( (For example, characters such as “put a ball in an open attacker and get a chance change!” Or a design) are displayed, and the probability change period display unit 41e displays the small hit probability change variation. The remaining number of games is displayed. At this time, in the small hit probability changing period, not only the special figure 2 but also the special figure 1 has a high hit probability.

  Then, when the small hit probability change period (challenge time) is entered, and the variation display due to the small hit probability change is started, as shown in FIG. 77 (c), the remaining game displayed on the probability change period display 41e every time the game is started. The number is updated by -1. At this time, if there is a hold (here, the hold shown in FIG. 1), the variable display game associated with the hold is executed, and the display of the hold is updated by −1 for each execution. Then, such a variable display game is continued (see FIGS. 77 (d) and (e)), and when a small hit occurs in the variable display game during the probability change period (see FIG. 77 (f)), FIG. 77 (g). As shown, the open / close door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening) as an attacker is opened in an open mode B (3.6 seconds × 1 time), and the display unit 41a of the display device 41 includes: Along with the release of the special variable winning device 38 due to the small hit, it is related to a command (mission) for acquiring the specific game state (high probability mode state, high probability state) of the transition destination (for example, “Do your best because the attacker opens.” Display a character such as “Insert a ball!

  At this time, if the game ball wins (in this case, two wins) while the special variable winning device 38 is opened, as shown in FIG. 77 (h), the display unit 41a of the display device 41 wins the win. (For example, characters such as “two winning prizes ☆” or a design) are displayed. In addition, the winning counter 41c of the display unit 41a displays the number of winnings to the open large winning opening (here, “2” indicating two) and notifies the player of the number of winnings.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 78 (a) to (e), the small hit probability variation display game is executed in the same manner as described above (FIGS. 77 (e) to (h)), and the small hit probability variation display is performed. When the period (challenge time) ends, as shown in FIG. 78 (f), the display time is extended on the display unit 41a of the display device 41 to display a stop symbol, and the winning counter 41c of the display unit 41a is displayed with a large amount. The cumulative number of winnings in the winning opening (here, “14” indicating 14) is displayed to notify the player of the number of winnings.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (g), the display unit 41a of the display device 41 displays the game result in the small hit probability change period (for example, characters such as “you who have acquired 14…” , A pattern F relating to the lottery of the transfer destination corresponding to the result is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78 (h), the specific gaming state to be transferred is determined on the display unit 41a of the display device 41 in accordance with the number of winnings to the big winning opening opened during the small hit probability changing period. (For example, the letter “B mode get !!” or a picture F indicating that the transition to the B mode has been determined) is displayed, and in addition to this display, for example, a state in which a flame is burning is displayed. The reproduced effect image FA is additionally displayed as a background on the display unit 41a (in this case, since it is the B mode, which is the approximate center of the display unit 41a), indicating that the transition destination has a higher probability than the current probability state. It is like that. At this time, it is obtained by notifying the player at the end of the small hit probability changing period without displaying the number of winnings in the big winning opening during the small hit probability changing period (that is, not notifying the player). You may make it alert | report the specific game state.

  In this invention, the big winning opening (that is, the special variable winning device 38) of the gaming machine 10 may be provided in two places. For example, as shown in FIG. 79 in which parts corresponding to those in FIG. 2 are denoted by the same reference numerals, a special variable winning device 38 as a first variable winning device is provided on the lower side in the game area 32, and a second variable winning device is provided on the upper side. And the game control device 100 (control means) indicates the state of the special game state to be generated (that is, the special result of the variable display game in which the special game state is generated). Depending on the design, the special fluctuation winning device 38 on the lower side (first variable winning device) and the special fluctuation winning device 38 on the upper side (second variable winning device) are respectively in the first state (blocked state) or the first You may make it convert into a 2 state (open state) suitably.

  For example, the opening mode of the special fluctuation winning device 38 on the lower side and the upper side may be switched every predetermined round, and only the upper side may be opened at the time of a small hit. In this case, there is an advantage that it is possible to make it easier to win a big winning opening at the time of a small hit by opening the upper side where the winning is easier than the lower side.

  Thus, since the special variable winning device 38 is provided in two places, the first variable winning device (lower side) and the second variable winning device (upper side), only one special variable winning device 38 is provided. As the gaming mode can be changed as compared with the gaming machine, the gameability can be improved, and one second variable winning device (the upper special floating winning device 38) can be used for the other first variable winning device. Since the player can expect a winning ball by arranging the player (the special fluctuation winning device 38 on the lower side) so that the player can expect a winning ball, the player can continue to hit the gaming ball, and thus can prevent the hitting. The interest can be enhanced even in the second special game state which is lower in value than the first special game state and is not welcomed by the player.

  Furthermore, although not shown in the drawings, a special area is provided in the special variable winning device 38 (big prize opening), and in a prescribed round, a game ball can be passed through the specific area, so that a small hit probability variation period can be added, You may make it promote the specific game state of a transfer destination.

  As described above, in this embodiment, after the end of the first special gaming state (big hit), the state of the second special gaming state (small hit) does not immediately shift to the specific gaming state (probability change or short time). Since a small hit probability change period with increased probability is provided, and the specific game state (mode state) of the transition destination is determined based on the winning number information by the small hit in the small hit probability change period, after the big hit ends With a small hit release during the small hit probability change period (open state of the big winning opening due to the small hit), by winning more game balls, it is possible to obtain a few prize balls and further advantageous identification It has the advantage that a gaming state can be acquired.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the probability state control means (the game control device 100) performs the operation for the predetermined period after the first special gaming state (big hit) ends. 2 When the probability state in which the special gaming state (small hit) is generated is controlled with a higher probability state than the normal probability state, and a small hit is generated by the special variable display game in the predetermined period, According to the winning state of the game ball to the variable winning device (special variable winning device 38) converted into the two states, the probability state that the special gaming state occurs after the end of the predetermined period can be controlled. ing.

  Therefore, the control of the game control device 100 (probability state control means) generates a small hit with a high probability (provides a small hit probability change period) for a predetermined period after the big hit ends. It becomes a very desirable situation for the player that the occurrence frequency is increased, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced. In addition, when a small hit is generated by the variable display game in a predetermined period after the end of the big hit, the game ball is awarded to the special variable winning device 38 converted to the second state in response to the occurrence of the small hit. Accordingly, since the probability state that the special gaming state occurs after the end of the predetermined period is controlled, it is possible to increase the interest even if the jackpot is lower than the jackpot and is not welcomed by the player. The dissatisfaction of the person can be dispelled.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable winning device (special variable winning device 38) is the first variable winning device (lower special variable winning device 38) and the second variable winning device (upper special variation). And the control means (game control device 100) sets the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device to the first state (blocked) according to the state of the special game state to be generated. State) or the second state (open state) as appropriate.

  Accordingly, the special variation winning device 38 includes the lower special variation winning device 38 and the upper special variation winning device 38, and the game control device 100 (control means) is a mode of a special gaming state to be generated (that is, the control means). The special variation winning device 38 on the lower side and the special variation winning device 38 on the upper side are respectively closed or opened in accordance with the symbol shown as a special result of the variable display game in which the special gaming state is generated). As a special result, for example, when winning with an even number of symbols such as “2” and “4”, the special variation winning device 38 on the lower side is converted into an open state, and “3”, “7”, etc. In winning with odd symbols, the upper special variable winning device 38, which is easier to win than the lower special varying winning device 38, is converted to an open state, so that winning with odd symbols can be achieved. Production and along the general recognition in a player that can win a favorable game value, it is possible to realize a grant of benefits. In addition, since the special variable winning device 38 is provided in two places, that is, the special floating winning device 38 on the lower side and the special floating winning device 38 on the upper side, the special variable winning device 38 can be used in only one gaming machine. Compared to the fact that the game mode can be changed in comparison, the gameability can be improved, and the one (upper) special variation winning device 38 is easier to win than the other (lower) special variation winning device 38. Since the player can expect a prize ball, the player will continue to hit the game ball. Can be increased.

<Fourth embodiment>
From here, the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. Hereinafter, the same components as those in the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted, and only differences from the first embodiment will be described.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the end of the first special gaming state (big hit), the game machine 10 does not immediately shift to the specific gaming state (probability change or short time), and remains in the second special gaming state (small hit) for a predetermined period. A small hit probability change period with an increased probability is provided, and the specific game state (mode state, probability state) of the transition destination is determined based on the winning number information by the small hit in the small hit probability change period. Furthermore, at this time, a plurality of small hit probabilities after the big hit are set, and different probabilities are set according to the big hit symbols. It is made possible to recognize (for example, an effect in accordance with general recognition in a player that a winning with an odd symbol can obtain a game value more advantageous than a winning with an even symbol, or a privilege is given).

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, the special result that can be generated in the special figure variation display game, the big hit end process (step A13; see FIG. 33) of the special figure game process (see FIG. 12) is the first implementation described above. It differs from the form as follows.

  Specifically, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), when the big hit symbol is “4”, the small hit probability is set to a medium probability, and when the big hit symbol is “3”, The hit probability is set to a high probability B, and when the big hit symbol is “7”, the small hit probability is set to a high probability A. In addition, as a specific gaming state (mode state, probability state) set as a gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state, a prize is awarded to the special variation winning device 38 as a winning mode of the game ball to the special variation winning device 38. When the winning number of game balls is used, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), when the number of winnings is 0 to 3, the probability state that is changed after the small hit is a low value that does not change from before the small hit occurs. In the probability state, the upper limit number of times of executing the special figure variation display game in the ordinary power support state (hereinafter referred to as the ordinary power support number) is not changed, and the mode state is set to the normal mode. When the number of winnings is 4 to 8, the probability state is a medium probability state, the number of power support is set to 20, and the mode state is set to A mode. When the number of winnings is 9 to 12, the probability state is the high probability B state, the number of power support is set to 100 times, and the mode state is set to the B mode. When the number of winnings is 15 or more, the probability state is a high probability A state, and the mode state is set to the C mode until the next special figure variation display game is started.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the jackpot end process in the present embodiment will be described.
As shown in FIG. 81 in which parts corresponding to those in FIG. Steps A713b, A711a, and Step A711b are added between Steps A711 and A712.

  That is, in the big hit end processing, first, the big hit symbol information is acquired (step A713a), and a signal related to the start of the small hit probability variation state corresponding to the acquired big hit symbol information is saved in the external information output data area (step A721a). Then, a signal related to the start of the small hit probability changing state corresponding to the acquired big hit symbol information is saved in the test signal output data area (step A722a). Next, the number at the time of small hit probability change is saved in the game state display number area (step A723a), and the probability information command (small hit probability change) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A726a). Thereafter, a probability information command related to the small hit probability variation state corresponding to the acquired big hit symbol information is prepared (step A710a), and command setting processing is performed (step A711). The probability information command is transmitted later to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 sets production contents based on this information.

  Then, the small hit probability information corresponding to the big hit symbol is set (step A713b), the initial value (for example, 10 games) of the small hit probability change variation number is saved in the small hit probability change variation number area (step a711a), The flag relating to the probability change period (small hit probability change period flag) is saved (step A711b), the special figure normal process transition setting process is performed (step A712), and the big hit end process is terminated. Here, the continuation value of the small hit probability changing period may be determined so as to differ depending on the big hit symbol, or may be determined by overflow during big hit or passing through a predetermined area. Alternatively, the extension of the small hit probability change period may be determined by performing a mission in a predetermined round during the big hit and achieving the mission. Then, the number of games in which the small hit probability variation period is extended (continued) is saved as an initial value of the number of small hit probability variation.

  By this process, the length of the subsequent small hit probability change period is set according to the big hit symbol, and the specific gaming state after the end of the small hit probability change period is determined according to the number of winnings to the big winning opening during the small hit probability change period. Is done.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the big hit with “7”, the big winning opening is frequently opened with a high probability of the small hit, so that more game balls are won. (The number of winnings can be increased), and as a result, it is likely to be in a probable state. On the other hand, after a big hit such as “4”, the small hit is a medium probability, and since the number of times of opening of the big winning opening is reduced compared to the big hit of “7”, it is not possible to expect too many winnings. By making it difficult to acquire a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, it is possible to give a player a value corresponding to a conventional probability variation symbol and a normal symbol.

  In the third and fourth embodiments described above, the special winning award (special variation winning device 38) is provided at two locations on the lower side and the upper side in the game area, and these lower and upper special variation winning devices. For example, as a special result of the special variation display game, the special variation winning device 38 (first variation winning device) on the lower side is opened in the winning with the even symbols such as “2” and “4”. In the winning with odd symbols such as “3” and “7”, the upper special variable winning device 38 (second variable winning device) that is easier to win than the first variable winning device may be opened. In this case, it is possible to achieve an effect in line with the general recognition of the player that the winning with odd symbols can obtain a more advantageous game value, and the provision of a privilege.

  Further, the continuation of the small hit probability variation period may be determined according to the number of small winning prizes in a specific gaming state (for example, if a small winning probability variation period is won, medium probability rush etc.). Furthermore, after the big hit, specific game state information is set for each symbol that has generated the big hit, and the small hit probability is set in a plurality of stages in this specific game state. Then, the probability change may be continued on the condition of winning at the small hit that occurs in the specific game state (the probability change continuation count is set), or the probability may be set. In addition, a certain number of preset probability changes (for example, a 10 game small hit probability change period) is guaranteed, and a small hit probability change period is generated depending on the design for a predetermined period thereafter, based on the number of winnings in the small hit probability change period. You may make it set the probability variation continuation frequency and probability.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the plurality of probability states include a plurality of probability states in which the second special gaming state (small hit) occurs in a predetermined period, and the probability state control means ( The game control device 100) determines the second special game state (in the predetermined period) according to the type of the special result in the special variable display game that has generated the first special game state (big hit) that triggered the start of the predetermined period. The probability state in which the “small hit” is generated can be set to any one of a plurality of probability states. In other words, the small hit probability variation period is set based on the big hit symbol in the special variation display game that has generated the big hit, and the game ball wins in the big winning opening during the small hit probability variation period (small hit probability variation period). The specific gaming state after the end of the small hit probability change period is determined according to the number.

  Therefore, depending on the type of special result of the variable display game that generated the big hit that triggered the start of the predetermined period (the jackpot symbol shown as the special result), the probability state that the small hit will occur in the predetermined period, Any one of a plurality of probability states can be set. That is, since the probability state that a small hit occurs in a predetermined period can be changed according to the big hit symbol shown as the special result, the value of the symbol that the player usually recognizes (in other words, even symbols (for example, “ 4 ”), it is possible to grant benefits corresponding to odd symbols (for example,“ 7 ”) winning a game value that is more advantageous to the player, such as winning the game value. Become.

<Fifth Embodiment>
From here, the gaming machine 10 according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described. Hereinafter, the same components as those in the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted, and only differences from the first embodiment will be described.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to another embodiment of the present invention, when a specific big hit or small win is made, after the special gaming state occurs, the specific gaming state becomes a small hit for a predetermined period (the small special gaming state is To increase the probability of occurrence). In addition, when a game ball wins the special variable winning device 38 (hereinafter referred to as “special small hit winning”) that is a small hit in the specific gaming state and can be won in the small special gaming state, a privilege (ordinary figure high) according to the number of winnings. Probability transfer lottery, latent notification, prefetch result notification, etc.). For this reason, in this embodiment, the setting contents of the special result of the special figure variation display game, the big hit end setting processes 1 to 5 (steps A705 to A709), the small hit end process (step A19), and the normal figure normal process (step B7) ), The count switch monitoring process (step A2) is different from the first embodiment as described below.

  In the game control device 100 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the special figure variation display game is higher than the small hit probability state A, which is a normal probability (in this case, 1/300), and the small hit probability state A. It is possible to set either a small hit probability state B having a probability (in this case, 1/100) or a small hit probability state C having a higher probability (in this case, 1/50) than the small hit probability state B. Yes. That is, the state set in the hit probability state B or C is the specific gaming state.

In the present embodiment, the setting change of the small hit probability state is performed in accordance with the winning special result after the special gaming state ends. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 82, if the special result is 15R probability variation A, the small hit probability state A is set, and if the special result is 15R normal A, 15R normal B, or small hit, the special gaming state ends. And a small hit probability state B is set until the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times. When the special result is 15R probability variation B or 2R probability variation, the small hit probability state C is set until the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times after the special game state is finished. That is, in the small hit probability state C (high probability), a small hit occurs with a higher probability than the small hit probability state B (medium probability), and the big prize opening is opened. Even if it is, it is possible to guess the internal probability state by looking at the opening frequency of the big prize opening.
Whether the probability of small hits is set to medium probability (1/100) or high probability (1/50) is determined by a lottery before entering the specific gaming state. Also good.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
Next, the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A705) of this embodiment will be described.
As shown in FIG. 83, the jackpot end setting process 1 of the present embodiment is different from the above-described embodiment (see FIG. 33) in that steps A721b and A722b are added after step A727. ing. Specifically, in this process, after the process of step A727, a corresponding small hit probability (here, 1/300) is set (step A721b). Then, the small hit probability state A is set (step A722b), and the big hit end setting process 1 is ended.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, the jackpot end setting process 2 (step 706) of this embodiment will be described.
As shown in FIG. 84, the jackpot end setting process 2 of the present embodiment is different from the process of the above-described embodiment (see FIG. 34) in that steps A731a to A734a are added after step A737. ing. Specifically, in this process, after the process of step A737, a corresponding small hit probability (here, 1/50) is set (step A731a). Then, the small hit probability state C is set (step A732a), and an initial value (100 in this case) is set in the specific game execution count area (step A733a). The specific game execution count is the number of times that the specific game state (small hit probability state B or C) is continued. And the specific game execution flag which shows that the specific game state mentioned above has generate | occur | produced is set (step A734a), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is complete | finished.
With this process, after winning 15R probability variation B, a specific gaming state (small hit probability state C (high probability)) occurs for a predetermined period (100 times).

[Big jackpot end setting 3]
Next, the jackpot end setting process 3 (step A707) of the present embodiment will be described.
As shown in FIG. 85, the jackpot end setting process 3 of this embodiment is different from the above-described embodiment (see FIG. 35) in that steps A741a to A744a are added after step A747. ing. Specifically, in this process, after the process of step A747, a corresponding small hit probability (here, 1/100) is set (step A741a). Then, a small hit probability state B is set (step A742a), and an initial value (100 in this case) is set in the specific game execution frequency area (step A743a). Then, the specific game execution flag is set (step A744a), and the big hit end setting process 3 is ended.
With this process, after winning 15R normal A, a specific gaming state with a small hit probability state B (medium probability) occurs for a predetermined period (100 times).

[Big hit end setting process 4]
Next, the jackpot end setting process 4 (step A708) of this embodiment will be described.
As shown in FIG. 86, the jackpot end setting process 4 of the present embodiment is different from the process of the above-described embodiment (see FIG. 36) in that the processes of steps A751a to A754a are added after step A757. ing. Specifically, in this process, after the process of step A757, a corresponding small hit probability (here, 1/100) is set (step A751a). Then, a small hit probability state B is set (step A752a), and an initial value (100 in this case) is set in the specific game execution count area (step A753a). Then, the specific game execution flag is set (step A754a), and the big hit end setting process 4 is ended.
With this process, after winning 15R normal B, a specific gaming state with a small hit probability state B (medium probability) occurs for a predetermined period (100 times).

[Big hit end setting process 5]
Next, the jackpot end setting process 5 (step A709) of this embodiment will be described.
As shown in FIG. 87, the jackpot end setting process 5 of the present embodiment is different from the process of the above-described embodiment (see FIG. 37) in that steps A761a to A764a are added after step A767. ing. Specifically, in this process, after the process of step A767, a corresponding small hit probability (here, 1/50) is set (step A761a). Then, the small hit probability state C is set (step A762a), and an initial value (100 in this case) is set in the specific game execution frequency area (step A763a). Then, the specific game execution flag is set (step A764a), and the big hit end setting process 5 is ended.
With this process, after winning the 2R probability variation, a specific gaming state with a small hit probability state C (medium probability) occurs for a predetermined period (100 times).

[Small hit end processing]
Next, the small hit end process of the present embodiment related to the small hit end process (see FIG. 44) in step A19 in the above-described special figure game process (see FIG. 12) will be described. The small hit end process described here corresponds to the processing content in the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (see FIG. 46) of step A940 in the above-described small hit end process (see FIG. 44). Although they are duplicated in the processing (steps A1001 to A1006), they are different in that they are executed not as the special figure normal processing transition setting processing 3 but as the small hitting end processing, and therefore will be described in detail. To do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 88, in the small hit end process in the present embodiment, first, “0” is set as the process number (step A1001), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area. (Step A1002). Then, a signal related to the end of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A1003), and a signal related to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1004). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1005), and the round LED pointer area is reset (step A1006). Then, the corresponding small hit probability (here, 1/100) is set (step A1007), and the small hit probability state B is set (step A1008). Then, an initial value (here, 100 times) is set in the specific game execution count area (step A1009), a specific game execution flag is set (step A1010), and the small hit end processing is terminated.
With this process, after the small hit is completed, a specific gaming state with a small hit probability state B (medium probability) occurs for a predetermined period (100 times).

[Count switch monitoring processing]
Next, the count switch monitoring process of the present embodiment related to the count switch monitoring process (step A2) of the special figure game process (see FIG. 12) described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 89, in the count switch monitoring process, first, it is checked whether or not the big winning opening based on the small hit is being performed (step A231). Here, when it is determined that the big winning opening based on the small hit is being made (step A232; Yes), it is checked whether there is an input to the count switch 38a (step A233). Here, when it is determined that there is no input to the count switch (step A234; No), the count switch monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an input (step A234; Yes), it is checked whether or not there is a specific game execution flag indicating the occurrence of the specific game state (step A235). Here, when it is determined that there is a specific game execution flag (step A236; Yes), the small winning prize information is updated by +1 (step A237), the count update process is performed (step A238), and the process of step A239 is performed. Migrate to On the other hand, when it determines with there being no specific game execution flag (step A236; No), the process after step A238 is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A232 that the special winning opening based on the small hit is not opened (step A232; No), the process proceeds to step A239. In the process of step A239, it is checked whether or not the big winning opening based on the jackpot is being opened. Here, when it is determined that the big winning opening based on the jackpot has not been opened (step A240; No), the count switch monitoring process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big winning opening based on the jackpot is being opened (step A240; Yes), it is checked whether there is an input to the count switch 38a (step A241). Here, when it is determined that there is no input to the count switch (step A242; No), the count switch monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an input (step A242; Yes), a count update process is performed (step A243), and the count switch monitoring process is terminated.

  As a result of this processing, when the game ball is won in the special winning state (small winning probability state B or C) and the game ball wins the big winning opening, the winning number is counted as the small winning prize number information.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, the special figure display processing (step A9) of the present embodiment will be described.
The special chart display process in this embodiment is shown in FIG. 90 when it is determined that the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A433; No) as a result of checking the big hit flag 1 in step A433 of FIG. 26 in the above-described embodiment. In this way, it is checked whether there is a special low game execution flag (step A550). Here, when it is determined that there is a specific game execution flag (step A551; Yes), a specific variation number management process (step A552) for counting the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the specific game state is performed. The process proceeds to A553. On the other hand, when it determines with there being no specific game execution flag (step A551; No), it transfers to the process of step A553.

  In step A553, a process is performed to determine whether or not the gaming state is a short-time state in which the normal-variation display game is set to the short-time operation state and the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 is extended. Here, if it is determined that the gaming state is not the time-short state (step A553; No), a special figure normal process transition setting process (step A554) is performed, and the special figure displaying process is terminated. In the process of step A554, a process for setting the process number “0” or the like related to the special figure normal process is performed in a table for shifting to the special figure normal process (the special figure game sequence branching table in FIG. 13 described above).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A553 that the gaming state is the short-time state (step A553; Yes), the number of short-time fluctuations related to the number of times (for example, 100 times) that the special figure variation display game is played in the short-time operation state is updated After (-1) (step A555), it is determined whether or not the number of short-time fluctuations after the update is 0 (step A556). Here, if it is determined that the remaining number of short-time fluctuations is not 0 (step A556; No), the process proceeds to step A557, and it is determined whether or not a special figure high probability state is present. If it is determined that the state is not in the special figure high probability state (step A557; No), the special figure normal process transition setting process (step A554) is performed, and the special figure display in-process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A557 that the special figure high probability state is present (step A557; Yes), the special figure fluctuation count is updated by -1 (step A558), and the remaining special figure fluctuation count is reduced to zero. It is determined whether or not (step A559). Here, when it is determined that the number of times has not reached zero (step A559; No), the special figure normal process transition setting process (step A554) is performed, and the special figure displaying process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining number of special figure fluctuations has become zero (step A559; Yes), a probability information command at the end of high probability is prepared (step A560). Then, a signal relating to the end of the high probability state is saved in the external information output data area (step A561), and a signal relating to the end of the high probability state is saved in the test signal output data area (step A562). Then, a flag indicating the special figure low probability state and the short time state is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A563), and the probability information command (short time) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A564). Then, the special figure variation frequency area is reset (step A565), and the special figure display in-process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A556 that the number of time-varying fluctuations is 0 (step A556; Yes), that is, a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the time-shortening state of the special figure fluctuation display game. When the execution of is completed, the probability information command for ending the short-time operation state of the special figure fluctuation display game and the normal figure fluctuation display game and the state of extending the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (short-time state) Prepare (step A566). Then, a signal relating to the end of time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step A567), and a signal relating to the end of time reduction is also saved in the test signal output data area (step A568).

  Then, the flag indicating the low-probability state and the normal power support state is saved in the normal-game mode flag area (step A569), and the special-game mode flag area indicates the low-probability state and the short time state. Is saved (step A569a). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A569b), the time fluctuation count area is reset (step A569c), and the special figure display processing is terminated.

  By this process, the special figure high probability state is entered from the end of the special game state until the special figure variation display game is executed for the ST number (70 times) (ST period). In addition, the period from the end of the special gaming state to the time when the special figure variation display game is executed for the number of times of general power support (74 times) (the general power support period) is in a short time state.

[Specific fluctuation count management processing]
Next, the specific variation number management process (step A552) in the special figure display process of the present embodiment described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 91, in the specific variation count management process, first, the specific game execution count is updated by -1 (step A571), and it is determined whether the remaining execution count of the specific game has become zero. Here, when it is determined that the remaining number of executions has become 0 (step A572; No), the specific variation number management process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining number of executions of the specific game has not become 0 (step A572; Yes), the bonus game winning number information is acquired (step A573), and the privilege information corresponding to the bonus game winning number information is acquired. Is set (step A574). The privilege information indicates the content of the privilege to be given to the player, and a plurality of types (for example, in the latent state, the probability state is informed, the hold prefetch result is informed, whether or not to perform the electric power support, or not. The lottery is performed, and if there is no time reduction, the usual high probability transition lottery is performed). Although description of a specific process is abbreviate | omitted, in the process of step A574, privilege information is set so that a privilege advantageous to a player may be provided, so that there are many small winning prizes.

After the privilege information is set in step A574, the specific game execution flag is cleared (step A575). Then, the specific game execution count area is cleared (step A576), and the specific variation count management process is terminated.
By this process, a privilege is given according to the number of game balls (the number of specific small winning prizes) won in the big winning opening when the small winning is made in the specific gaming state.
It should be noted that a list of benefits that can be acquired at the end timing of the specific gaming state may be presented to the player to give the player a desired privilege. In addition, a condition for acquiring a desired privilege is presented to the player at the start of a specific period, such as “○ get XX! You may be able to do that.

By the way, after 2R probability change and small hit, since it becomes a latent state where the probability state is not clearly notified, the game may proceed in the flow as shown in FIG. Specifically, if the 2R probability change is won in the special figure low probability state and no short time state (D1), after the special gaming state is finished, the special figure high probability state and the short time state are obtained, and the small hit probability state C (high probability) ) Is set (D2). At this time, the probability state of the special figure is not clearly notified, and the player cannot know the probability state. If the 2R probability change is won again in this state, after the special gaming state is finished, the special figure high probability state and the short time state are entered, and the small hit probability state C (high probability) is continued. In this case, the probability state of the special figure is clearly notified (D3).
On the other hand, if a special hit is made in the special figure high probability state, no short time state and small hit probability state C (D2), the special figure high probability state, no short time state and a latent state are continued (D4).

  When winning a small hit in the special figure low probability state and no short time state (D1), the special figure low probability state and the short timeless state are continued, and the small hit probability state B (medium probability) is set (D5). At this time, the probability state of the special figure is not clearly notified, and the player cannot know the probability state. If the 2R probability variation is won in this state, a special figure high probability state and no time reduction state are set, and a small hit probability state C (high probability) is set (D6). At this time, the probability state of the special figure is not clearly notified, and the player cannot know the probability state. If the 2R probability change is won again in this state, after the special gaming state is finished, the special figure high probability state and the short time state are entered, and the small hit probability state C (high probability) is continued (D7). In this case, the probability state of the special figure is clearly notified. On the other hand, if the special figure high probability state, the short time absence state and the small hit probability state C are won, the special figure high probability state, the short time absence state and the latent state are continued (D8). Further, as long as only small hits continue, the state where the probability state cannot be known continues (D9, 10).

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the frequency of occurrence of small hits increases when a specific gaming state occurs. Therefore, in the above-described flow, a state in which a hit that does not know whether the 2R probability variation is won or the small win is frequently generated continues for a long time in a latent state. Then, the player pays attention to the opening / closing of the big prize opening, which is unknown, in the hope of the end of the latent state (continuous 2R probability change).

<Fifth Embodiment Modification 1>
In the present embodiment, as described above, a privilege is not given according to the number of specific small winnings (whether the number of specific small winnings is large or small), but a predetermined number necessary for acquiring the privilege. Present the number of winnings (norm) in advance (select and set the predetermined number of winnings corresponding to the privilege to be granted in advance processing), and give it only when the number of winnings per specific small number reaches the predetermined number of winnings Also good. In such a case, the following processing is performed in the count switch monitoring processing (step A2).

[Count switch monitoring processing]
As shown in FIG. 93, the count switch monitoring process of this modification is the same as that of the above-described embodiment (FIG. 89) in that the processes of steps A231a to A234a are added between steps A237 and A238. See). Specifically, in this process, after updating the small winning prize number information by +1 in step A237, it is determined whether or not the small winning prize number has reached a predetermined number (step A231a). Here, when it is determined that the predetermined number has not been reached (step A231a; No), the process proceeds to step A238. On the other hand, when it determines with having reached the predetermined number (step A231a; Yes), corresponding privilege information is set (step A232a). Then, the specific game execution flag is cleared (step A233a), the specific game execution count area is cleared (step A234a), and the process proceeds to step A238.

[Special figure display processing]
Although illustration is omitted, the special figure display processing of this modification is different from the above-described processing of this embodiment (see FIG. 90) in that the processing of steps A550 to A552 is omitted. . That is, in this process, when it is determined in step A433 (see FIG. 26) that the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit, the process after step A553 is performed without performing the process related to the privilege grant.

[Example of production]
Here, the flow of the game in the specific game state in this modification will be described.
As shown in FIG. 94 (a), when the special figure variation display game has a special result for generating a specific game state and a latent state, the display unit 41a of the display device 41 shows a specific small winning number. In addition to displaying the small winning prize meter m, it is displayed that the large winning opening is opened more than usual (the small winning probability is increased). When the small hit is made, as shown in FIG. 94B, the background state image in the ambiguous mode is displayed on the display unit 41a, and the subsequent probability state is not notified. In this state, as shown in FIG. 94 (c), when the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display unit 41a displays a notice that the big prize opening will be opened and also opens the big prize opening. At this time, if there is a game ball winning in the big winning opening, the display on the small hit winning meter m is increased by the number of winning (in this case, one).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 94 (d) and FIG. 95 (a), winning per win, opening of the big winning opening, and winning of the game ball are repeated, and as shown in FIG. When the display value of m reaches the maximum value, a privilege is granted. In this example, the notification of the probability state is a privilege. Here, for example, as shown in FIGS. 95 (c) to 95 (e), a shutter S that blocks the background image is displayed on the display unit 41 a, and an effect that opens according to the operation of the effect button 25 is displayed. Do. When the shutter S is fully opened, as shown in FIG. 95 (f), a display indicating that the high probability state is confirmed is performed.

  In this production example, the acquisition of the privilege is notified at the timing when the number of winnings reaches the predetermined number. .

<Fifth Embodiment Modification 2>
Moreover, although the example which makes notification of a probability state a privilege was demonstrated in this modification 1 of this embodiment mentioned above, it is good also considering the above-mentioned usual figure high probability transfer lottery as a privilege. In such a case, the following processing is performed in the count switch monitoring processing (step A2).

[Count switch monitoring processing]
As shown in FIG. 96, the count switch monitoring process of the present modification is the above-described book in that the process of step A237 is removed and the processes of steps A231b to A235b are added between steps A236 and A238. This is different from the processing in the embodiment (see FIG. 89). Specifically, in this process, when it is determined in step A236 that there is a specific game execution flag, a normal high probability lottery random number is acquired (step A231b). Then, the acquired random number is compared with a determination value (step A232b), and it is determined whether or not the common high probability transition lottery is won (step A233b).

Here, when it is determined that the usual high probability transfer lottery is not won (step A233b; No), the process proceeds to step A238. On the other hand, if it is determined that the usual high probability transition lottery has been won (step A233b; Yes), a flag indicating the normal high probability state and the general electric power support state is saved in the usual figure game mode flag area (step A234b). . Then, an initial value (for example, 30 times) is set in the time fluctuation range (step A235b), and the process proceeds to step A238. In step A235b, instead of using a predetermined initial value, it may be determined by lottery from a plurality of values, or the most recent jackpot symbol selected by associating a plurality of values with each jackpot symbol. You may make it set based on.
With this process, the ordinary high probability transition lottery is executed every time there is a specific small win, and when the common figure high probability transition lottery is won, a short-time state occurs until the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times. .

[Specific fluctuation count management processing]
Although illustration is omitted, the specific variation number management process of the present modification is different from the process of the above embodiment (see FIG. 91) in that the processes of steps A573 and A574 are omitted. That is, in this process, if it is determined in step A572 that the number of times of execution of the specific game has become 0, the process after step A575 is performed without acquiring the small winning prize information and setting the privilege information.

<Fifth Embodiment Modification 3>
Moreover, in this embodiment, you may make it provide the power transmission support of the predetermined number of times after completion | finish of a specific game state as a privilege. In such a case, the following processing is performed in the count switch monitoring process (step A2) and the specific variation number management process (step A503b).

[Count switch monitoring processing]
As shown in FIG. 97, in the count switch monitoring process of the present modification example, the process of step A237 is excluded, the processes of steps A231c and A232c are performed between steps A234 and A235, and the process between steps A236 and A238. The processing of A233c to A236c is different from the processing of the present embodiment described above (see FIG. 89) in that each processing is added. Specifically, in this process, if it is determined in step A234 that there is an input to the count switch, it is checked whether there is a high probability setting flag (step A231c). Here, when it is determined that there is a high probability setting flag (step A232c; Yes), the processing after step A238 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no high probability setting flag (step A232c; No), the process proceeds to A235, and it is checked whether there is a specific game execution flag (step A235).

If it is determined that there is a specific game execution flag (step A236; Yes), a random number for usual high probability lottery is acquired (step A233c). Then, the acquired random number is compared with the determination value (step A234c), and it is determined whether or not the common high probability transition lottery is won (step A235c). Here, when it is determined that the usual high probability transfer lottery is not won (step A235c; No), the process proceeds to step A238. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal high probability transition lottery is won (step A235c; Yes), the high probability setting flag is set (step A236c), and the process proceeds to step A238.
If it is decided to grant ordinary power support by this process, the ordinary high probability lottery will not be performed thereafter.

  In addition, high probability lottery can be executed multiple times, and each time you win the lottery, the ordinary map power information will be ranked like high figure probability acquisition, normal figure fluctuation time shortening acquisition, general electricity open time extension acquisition, etc. You may make it do.

[Specific fluctuation count management processing]
As shown in FIG. 98, the specific variation frequency management process of the present modification is the same as that of the above-described embodiment (FIG. 91) in that the process of steps A573 and A574 is changed to the process of steps A571a to A574a. See). Specifically, in this process, if it is determined in step A572 that the specific game execution count has become zero, it is checked whether there is a high probability setting flag (step A571a). Here, when it is determined that there is no high probability setting flag (step A572a; No), the specific variation number management process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a high probability setting flag (step A572a; Yes), a flag indicating a high probability and a general power support state is saved in the normal game mode flag area (step A573a). Then, an initial value is set in the time fluctuation range (step A574a), and the process proceeds to step A575.
As a result of this processing, when the high probability setting flag is set, that is, when the ordinary high probability transition lottery is won in the count switch monitoring processing, the ordinary power support state occurs.

[Example of production]
Here, the flow at the time of performing the usual high probability transition lottery in this modification will be described.
When the special figure variation display game is executed in the specific game state, for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (a), the number of game balls won in the big prize opening in the small special game state is displayed on the display unit 41a of the display device 41. The small winning prize meter m shown is displayed. In this state, when a small hit occurs (here, the decorative special symbol stop mode is "1, 2, 3"), the open / close door 38c of the special variable prize-winning device 38 is opened and a game ball can be won. It becomes a state. Here, when a game ball wins in the big winning opening, the display of the small win winning meter m increases, and a normal high probability lottery is performed.

When the specific game period is over, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), based on the result of the ordinary high probability transition lottery executed so far, there is an effect of notifying whether or not to perform the ordinary power support thereafter. Done. In this example, an effect that makes it appear as if the ordinary power support state occurs by repeatedly pressing the effect button 25 is performed.
If the lottery for high-probability transition is won during the specific game period, the ordinary power support state occurs after the end of the performance. At this time, in the display unit 41a, as shown in FIG. 99 (c), a notification (for example, FIG. Display a delighted character C).
On the other hand, if the normal high probability transition lottery is not won, the normal variation winning device 37 is maintained in the normal operation state even after the end of the effect. At this time, as shown in FIG. 99 (d), the display unit 41a notifies that the generation of the general electric power support has failed (for example, the closed normal variation winning device F and the character C regretting the failure are displayed). )

<Sixth Embodiment>
From here, the gaming machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described. Hereinafter, the same components as those in the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted, and only differences from the first embodiment will be described.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to generate a big hit when a specific small hit winning can be continuously performed a predetermined number of times during a specific gaming state. In such a case, the following processing is performed in the count switch monitoring processing (step A2). In this embodiment, the open / close door 38c of the special variable prize-winning device 38 is opened twice in one small special game state, but if one of them can be opened, the small special game state is concerned. It is assumed that there was a specific small win.

[Count switch monitoring processing]
As shown in FIG. 100, the count switch monitoring process of the present modification is the third implementation described above in that the processes of steps A235 to A237 are excluded and the processes of steps A231d to A233d are added after step A234. This is different from the processing in the form (see FIG. 89). Specifically, in this process, when it is determined in step A234 that there is no input to the count switch 38a, the continuous winning counter is cleared (step A231d). Then, the information on the small winning consecutive winning area is cleared (step A232d), and the count switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A234 that there is an input to the count switch (step A234; Yes), the specific game clock number process (step A233d) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A239.
In this process, if there is a win in small wins, the number of consecutive wins is counted in the specific game clock number processing because the start of the consecutive wins or continuing, and there is no win in the small wins Will clear the count of consecutive wins that have been made.

[Specific game clock count processing]
As shown in FIG. 101, in the specific game clock number process, first, it is checked whether or not there is a specific game execution flag (step A881). Here, when it is determined that there is no specific game execution flag (step A222; No), the specific game clock number process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a specific game execution flag (step A882; Yes), information on the RWM small winning consecutive winning area is acquired (step A883), and it is checked whether there is a winning flag (step A884). . If it is determined that there is no winning flag (step A885; No), the winning flag is saved in the small winning consecutive winning area because the first small hitting is generated (step A886), and the continuous winning counter Is updated (+1) (step A887). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a winning flag (step A885; Yes), the process proceeds to step A887.

  After the process of updating the consecutive winning counter by +1 in step A887, it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive winning counter and the number of consecutive winnings have reached a predetermined number (step A888). Here, when it is determined that the predetermined number has not been reached (step A888; No), the specific game clock number process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined number has been reached (step A888; Yes), jackpot conversion information is set (step A889). When this jackpot conversion information is set, a special gaming state is forcibly generated. After the big hit conversion information is set, the continuous winning counter is cleared (step A890), and the information on the small winning consecutive winning area is cleared (step A891). Then, the specific game execution flag is cleared (step A892), the specific game execution count area is cleared (step A893), and the specific game clock count process is terminated.

  By this process, if it is the first small winning prize after the power is turned on, or if it is not possible to win in the previous small hit and it is won in this small hit, it is counted from the beginning The count value of the continuous winning counter is 1, and when the small winning prize is obtained in the state where the small winning prize is continuous until the previous time, 1 is added to the count value of the continuous winning counter until then. Further, when the counter value of the continuous winning counter reaches a predetermined number, the jackpot conversion information is set and the gaming machine starts to hit the jackpot.

  In addition, when two or more winnings are achieved in one small special game state, an additional game value such as probability change or electric support lottery may be given. Also, instead of immediately converting to a big win after a predetermined number of consecutive winnings, in step A 889, set the convertible information indicating to convert to a big winning at the next small winnings in step A 889, You may make it announce in advance that it will be converted into a big hit if it wins once a small hit.

[Example of production]
Here, the flow at the time of privilege acquisition in the present embodiment will be described. Here, a description will be given assuming that a specific gaming state occurs when a large number of big hits does not occur (so-called humiliation).
When the special figure variation display game is continuously deviated for a predetermined number of times, after the special figure variation display game is over, the mode shifts to the small hit frequent occurrence mode (specific game state). At this time, on the display unit 41a of the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 102 (a), the fact that the predetermined number of times has been reached, the small hit frequent occurrence mode is entered, and there is a possibility that a big hit can be obtained. . When a small hit is made in the special figure fluctuation display game (see FIG. 102B) performed in this state, the special fluctuation winning device 38 performs a small hit operation as shown in FIG. Here, when the game ball wins a big winning opening, for example, as shown in FIG. 102 (d), it is suggested that something happens due to winning in the display unit 41a of the display device 41 (for example, “GOOD !!”). Character) is displayed. Thereafter, the occurrence of a small hit and the winning of a game ball to the big winning opening are continued, and as shown in FIG. 102 (e), when a predetermined number of small hits occur and the gaming ball wins the big winning opening. In the display unit 41a, for example, as shown in FIG. 102 (f), the occurrence of the big hit is notified (for example, characters such as “GREAT !!” and “big hit conversion!”) Are displayed. .

  In addition, you may make it open | release the number of rounds for a small winning prize at the time of completion | finish of a specific game (it is good to respond | correspond to a setting round). Further, among 100 specific games, a small hit release time may be set every predetermined number of times, and the player may select whether or not to release based on the latest small hit symbol.

<Modification 1 of 6th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, instead of immediately opening the big prize opening when a small winning prize is received, it may be considered as a big hit by opening it together when the small winning prize reaches a predetermined number.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 103 (a), when the small hit frequent occurrence mode (specific game state) occurs, the display unit 41a of the display device 41 has achieved a small number of consecutive small hits in the small hit frequent occurrence mode. As shown in FIG. 103 (b), in addition to a special symbol and a start memory display, a display indicating the small hit frequent occurrence mode and a duration display N1 (in this mode) The number of special figure change display games to be executed (99 times in this case) and the number of small winning prizes display N2 (here, 0 times) in the small hit frequent occurrence mode are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 103 (c), when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit (here, the special symbol is “1, 2, 3” and stopped), the special variation prize winning device 38 is opened and closed. The door 38c opens. Here, if the game ball wins, as shown in FIG. 103 (d), it is displayed on the display unit 41a that the small win is successful, and the display of the number of small wins is updated (from “0”). Changed to “1”). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (e), when the special figure fluctuation display game is repeatedly executed in the small hit frequent occurrence mode and the number of small hits winning reaches a predetermined number (here, 5 times), FIG. 103 (f) As shown in FIG. 3, it is notified that the jackpot has been successfully acquired. Then, as shown in FIG. 103 (g), the open / close door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 is opened for five times.

  Also, when the number of small wins has reached a predetermined number, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), the big win is not immediately notified, and if the next small win can be won again, it will be a big win. You may make it alert | report. In this case, when the next small hit is reached as shown in FIG. 104 (d), the open / close door 38c is opened as shown in FIG. 104 (e). At this time, on the display unit 41a of the display device 41, it may be greatly displayed that the big prize opening is opened to draw the player's attention. Then, when a game ball is won at the big winning opening, it is notified that the big hit is made as shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the player may be able to select whether to aim for a small hit prize in the small hit frequent occurrence mode or to release the collective after the stock. The selection is performed at the start of a specific game, for example. When the release is selected collectively, the target number of rounds is further set, and if the small winnings for the number of rounds continue, a big hit for the number of rounds is given at the end of the specific game, or during the specific game If jackpots are generated and the target is achieved, jackpots for the number of rounds will be awarded.

<6th Embodiment modification 2>
In this embodiment, a plurality of patterns with different numbers of rounds and opening times may be prepared and used as the opening mode of the open / close door 38c of the special variation winning device 38 in the small special gaming state.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), the opening mode A in which the number of rounds is 2 and the opening time of the big winning opening is a short opening time (1.8 seconds), as shown in FIG. 105 (b), Two patterns of opening mode B in which the number of rounds is one round and the opening time of the grand prize opening is longer than the short opening time and shorter than the long opening time (for example, 3.6 seconds) are set, and the opening / closing door 38c is opened. Depending on the various conditions, the opening mode should be used properly.

[Operation example]
Here, the flow of the game when the above-described two patterns of opening modes (opening modes A and B) are selectively used according to the remaining period of the specific gaming state will be described.
When the small hit frequent occurrence mode (specific game state) occurs, the display unit 41a of the display device 41 indicates the small hit frequent occurrence mode as shown in FIG. 106 (a) in addition to the special symbol and start memory display. Display and display of the duration of the mode N1 (the number of special figure change display games executed in the mode, here 70 times), and the number of small winning prizes display N2 (here 0 times) in the small hit frequent occurrence mode To do. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit (here, the special symbol is “1,2,3” and stopped), as shown in FIG. 106 (b), the open / close door of the special variation prize winning device 38 is displayed. 38c opens. At this time, since the remaining duration of the small hit frequent occurrence mode is sufficient, and a small hit prize can be expected thereafter, at this stage, the open / close door 38c of the special variable prize winning device 38 is won more than the open mode B. Open in difficult opening mode A. Here, if the game ball wins, as shown in FIG. 106 (c), it is displayed on the display unit 41a that the small win is successful, and the display of the number of small wins is updated (from “0”). Changed to “1”).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 106 (d), the special figure fluctuation display game is repeatedly executed in the small hit frequent occurrence mode, and as shown in FIG. 106 (e), the first half of the small hit frequent occurrence mode ends (70 times). When the number of consecutive winnings has not reached the predetermined number necessary for generating a big hit at the time of executing 35 times of the special figure variation display game), as shown in FIG. Since there is not much remaining duration, the open / close door 38c of the special variable prize-winning device 38 is opened in an open mode B that makes it easier to win game balls than in the open mode A. This makes it easy to increase the number of consecutive winnings to a predetermined number even if the remaining period of the small hit frequent occurrence mode is small.
In the present modification, the second half of the release mode B is set when the first half of the small hit frequent occurrence mode cannot be won, but depending on the small hit probability state (B or C) to be set, It may be set whether to set the release mode, or may be determined by lottery every time a small hit is made.

<Sixth Embodiment Modification 3>
Also, in this embodiment, when a real big win occurs in a specific gaming state, an open mode may be adopted in which the number of specific small wins counted up to that time is added to the number of rounds in the special gaming state. Good.
For example, in the case of a normal 5R big hit, as shown in FIG. 107 (a), the long open time (25 seconds) is released five times continuously (ta, tb, tc, td, te). If, for example, two specific small wins have been counted before the 5R big win is generated, as shown in FIG. 107 (b), the opening time for one big winning opening is shortened (for example, 25 It seems that the special game state (ta1, ta2, tb1, tb2, tc, td, te) of all seven rounds occurred by making the grand prize opening and closing twice in one round. You may show it to.

  When both of the above-described two patterns (opening modes A and B) are used as the opening mode in the small special game state, when winning in the opening mode A having a high difficulty level for winning a prize, a special small-award winning is given once. You may make it increase the number of rounds at the time of big hit twice. That is, if the case shown in FIG. 107 (b) is that there are two specific small wins in the opening mode B, and if 5R big hits occur after the two specific small wins in the opening mode A, It is possible to open and close the 9th prize winning opening. By doing so, it is possible to make the player recognize that it has been connected to a big hit by winning a small win.

<Sixth Embodiment Variation 4>
Further, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls may be changed for each big hit round, and the opening mode of the open / close door 38c of the special variable prize-winning device 38 may be properly used according to the number of prize balls to be changed.
Specifically, two types of “player advantageous type” and “game store advantageous type” having different opening modes are set in the special gaming state. In the player advantageous type, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), 1 to 5 out of 15 rounds has 10 winning balls per winning ball, and the opening mode of the open / close door 38c is B. ing. In rounds 6 to 10, the number of winning balls per winning ball is 12, and the opening mode of the door 38c is A. In rounds 11 to 15, the number of winning balls is 14 per winning ball. The opening mode of the open / close door 38c is A.
In the open mode A, the open / close door 38c repeatedly opens and closes every round, so that 10 game balls are won, and when the open / close door 38c is about to close, the 11th game ball is successfully won and paid out. Can be increased. That is, when the player advantageous type is set, the period of the opening mode A in which the open / close door 38c is frequently opened and closed is long, and a large number of prize balls are set at that time. More balls will be welcomed by players.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), the amusement store advantageous type is 1 to 5 rounds out of 15 rounds, the opening mode of the open / close door 38c is A, and the opening mode is 6 to 15 rounds. The point is different from the player advantage type. In the opening mode B, the open / close door 38c continues to open over a plurality of rounds (here, 6 to 15 rounds), so one game ball is used as in the case of the opening mode A, except when closing at the end. It is not possible to increase the number of prize balls by winning extra. That is, when the game store advantageous type is set, the period of the opening mode A is short, and the number of prize balls at that time is set to be small, so that the number of prize balls to be paid to the player is reduced and the player has Although not welcomed, it will be welcomed by amusement stores.

<Sixth Embodiment Modification 5>
In the present embodiment, the open mode selection rate may be changed according to the internal probability state. For example, as shown in FIG. 109, if the selection rate of the open mode A is the same (for example, 1/30) in the 2R high probability and the small hit, the 2R high probability and the low are small even if the big prize opening is opened. It is possible to make it ambiguous which winning is won. On the other hand, if you want to suggest the actual probability state, you can infer the probability from the difference in the opening time of the big prize opening by increasing the selection rate of the opening mode B only for the 2R high probability. Expectation can also be raised.

<Sixth Embodiment Modification 6>
Moreover, in this embodiment, you may enable it for a player to select the opening aspect of the opening / closing door 38c of the special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus 38. FIG.
In this modification, a round for performing a mission during a round is set for each special mode. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 110 (a), missions are performed in the 2R big hit, the small round in the second round, the 10R big hit, and the 15R big hit in the second and 10th rounds. Further, as shown in FIG. 110 (b), the number of winning balls per winning ball is changed for each round.

[Example of production]
When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 111 (a), a mission for selecting the opening mode of the big prize opening starts in the second round of the special game state. This mission can be achieved by operating the effect button 25 in accordance with the movement of the meter. If the mission of this round is achieved, an open mode B having a long open time is set, and if not achieved, an open mode A having a short open time is set.
Which release mode is selected is determined by observing the condition of the nail, for example, whether or not 11 winnings can be aimed in one round. That is, when the eleven winnings are likely to be aimed, the opening mode A is selected, and when it is not likely to be aimed, the opening mode B is selected.

  Here, when it is determined that eleven winnings are unlikely to be aimed in one round, the effect button 25 is operated to achieve the mission. If the mission can be achieved here, it is notified that the setting of the release mode B has been successful, as shown in FIG. 111 (b). And when the round ends, the mission ends. Here, when the 2R big hit or the small hit is the trigger for performing the mission, the game returns to the normal game as shown in FIG. 111 (c). On the other hand, in the case of 10R big hit or 15R big hit, as shown in FIG. 111 (d), after the next round (3 rounds), the big winning opening is opened in the open mode B.

  When the mission is triggered by a 10R big hit or 15R big hit, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), the mission for selecting the opening mode of the big prize opening again at the 10th round starts. The contents of the mission are the same as in the second round here. However, if the mission of this round is achieved, the opening mode A with a short opening time is set, and if it is not achieved, the opening mode B with a long opening time is set.

  As described above, the number of winning balls per winning ball increases in the later rounds. Therefore, if it is determined that the player wants to win 11 winnings in one round in the open mode A, the mission must be accomplished. The effect button 25 is operated. If the mission can be achieved, it is notified that the setting of the opening mode A has been successful, as shown in FIG. 112 (b). And when the round ends, the mission ends. Here, when it is 10R big hit that triggered the mission, the game returns to the normal game. On the other hand, in the case of 15R big hit, as shown in FIG.

<Sixth Embodiment Modification 7>
Moreover, in this embodiment, you may make it change the opening mode of the big winning opening in a special game state, whenever a big hit is repeated.
For example, as shown in FIG. 113, in the first big hit, in the first round, 25 seconds is released once, and in the second and subsequent rounds, 5 seconds is released in five times to make one round. In the second big hit, in the first and second rounds, 25 seconds are released once, and in the third and subsequent rounds, 5 seconds are released five times in one round. Thereafter, as the big hits continue, the number of rounds that are opened once in 25 seconds is increased.

Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 114, in the first big hit, the first round is a 25-second release, and the second and subsequent rounds are a 5-second release. In the second big hit, in the first and second rounds, 25 seconds are released once, and in the third and subsequent rounds, 5 seconds are released once. Thereafter, as the big hits continue, the number of rounds that are opened once in 25 seconds is increased.
In addition, instead of regularly increasing the long opening as described above, it may be changed according to the gaming state when the big hit occurs.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a start winning device (ordinary variation) that can be converted into a guided state in which the game ball flowing down the game area 32 is guided to the start winning area 37 and a non-guided state that is not guided. And a control means (game control device 100) that guides the start winning device 37 for a first time and a second time that is longer than the first time. Whether or not to generate the winning easy state by means of the winning easy state generating means (game control device 100) capable of generating the winning easy state (the ordinary power support state) to be set, and the winning easy state generating means 100 The determination means (game control device 100) that performs such determination based on a predetermined lottery probability, and the probability state that the determination means 100 determines to generate a winning-winning state is a low probability state that is a low probability, Low probability A probability setting means (game control device 100) that can be set to a high probability state with a high probability, and whether the probability state is set to a high probability state by the probability setting means based on establishment of a predetermined condition High-probability transfer lottery means (game control device 100) for performing lottery.

  Therefore, the high-probability transition lottery means 100 performs lottery based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the probability setting means 100 sets the lottery probability based on the lottery result, and the determination means 100 facilitates winning a prize based on the lottery probability. A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a state. For this reason, if the occurrence of an event that is easier to achieve than the special gaming state (having a higher probability of occurrence) is set as a predetermined condition, even if the state in which the special gaming state does not occur continues, the winning easy state can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by the unprecedented game nature that the occurrence of the winning facilitated state can be expected at any time depending on the predetermined condition.

  In addition, the start winning area provided in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided at a position different from the first start winning area (start winning port 36) that does not include the start winning device 37 and the first start winning area. The control unit (game control device 100) has a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball in the first start winning area 36. The extracted random number is stored as a first start memory with the predetermined number as the upper limit, and a predetermined random number is extracted based on the winning of the game ball in the second start winning area 37, and the extracted random number is second started A start storage means (game control device 100) that stores a predetermined number as an upper limit as memory, and a first special variation display game (first special figure variation display game) based on winning of a game ball in the first start winning area 36 The second start Fluctuation display game execution means (game control device 100) for executing the second special variation display game (second special figure variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball in the award area 37, the first start memory and the second Priority control means (game control device 100) for causing the fluctuation display game executing means 100 to execute the second special fluctuation display game when the start memory is stored together, and the second special fluctuation display game includes the first special fluctuation display game. The content is more advantageous to the player than the display game.

  Therefore, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the start winning device 37 provided in the second start winning area 37 enters the easy winning state, and the second start memory that triggers the execution of the second variable display game is easily stored. Further, as long as the start memory means has the second start memory, the priority means executes the second special fluctuation display game with priority over the first special fluctuation display game. For this reason, when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the easy winning state occurs, it becomes a very desirable situation for the player that the second special variation display game is executed in succession, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, the special game state generated by the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a first special game state (15 rounds) and a second special game having a lower game value given to the player than the first special game state. State (2 rounds), and the control means (game control device 100) is a special fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation display game) based on the start memory stored in the start memory means (game control device 100). Pre-start determining means (game control device 100) for determining information related to the special variable display game before the start of the special variable display game, and the predetermined condition is determined by the pre-start determination means 100 so that the result of the special variable display game is the second special game Includes determining that a condition will occur.

  Therefore, since a lottery is performed to determine whether or not an easy winning state is generated when a second special gaming state having a lower gaming value than the first special gaming state occurs, a special game with low value and not welcomed by the player. A player's dissatisfaction when a state occurs can be wiped out.

  In addition, the control means (game control device 100) included in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment displays information related to the special variation display game based on the start memory stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). A specification for notifying the determination result of the pre-start determination unit 100 when the pre-start determination unit (game control device 100) and the pre-start determination unit 100 determine that a special game state is to be generated. A specific effect execution control means (effect control apparatus 300) capable of executing the effect, and the predetermined condition includes that the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution control means 300.

  Accordingly, when it is determined that a special gaming state occurs and a specific effect is executed, a high-probability transition lottery is performed. For this reason, a specific effect will serve as a notice of a high-probability transition lottery, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game when the specific effect is executed.

  In addition, the control means (game control device 100) provided in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a predetermined condition that passage of a game ball is detected in a predetermined area (ordinary start gate 34) of the game area 32. I am doing so.

  Therefore, since the predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball passes through the start area, the game ball continues to be hit in order to satisfy the predetermined condition, and the stoppage can be prevented.

  In addition, the control means (game control device 100) provided in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a probability setting means (game control) when the lottery probability used for determination by the determination means (game control device 100) is high. The apparatus 100) is provided with a falling lottery means (game control device 100) capable of executing a lottery for determining whether or not the lottery probability is set to a low probability.

  Therefore, when the lottery by the falling lottery means 100 is won, the lottery probability used for the determination of the determination means 100 set to a high probability is returned to a low probability. For this reason, even after winning a high-probability transition lottery, it may be returned to a low probability again in some cases, and when it returns to a low probability, Since the high-probability transition lottery is performed again, the probability that the winning facilitated state will rise and fall, so that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming rutted.

  Further, the special game state generated by the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a third special game state (small special game state) having a lower game value to be given to the player than the second special game state (2R). The control means (game control device 100) is characterized by increasing the probability that the third special game state will occur in the special variation display game (special diagram variation display game) after the special game state occurs.

  Therefore, after the third special gaming state ends, the probability that the third special gaming state will occur again increases. For this reason, compared to a low probability state in which a special gaming state hardly occurs, it is difficult for a player to psychologically stop the current game that can be given a certain amount of game value, and a reduction in the operating rate of the gaming machine can be prevented. .

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a special winning device (special variable winning device 38) that can be converted into a state in which a game ball cannot be won and a state in which a game ball can be won, and includes control means (game control). The device 100) places the special prize-winning device 38 in a state where it can win a predetermined time in the third special gaming state (small special gaming state), and has a high probability of entering the third special gaming state in the special variation display game (specific game). In the state), a predetermined condition is that a predetermined number of game balls are awarded to the special prize-winning device in which the third special gaming state has occurred and the prize is ready.

  Accordingly, when the third special game state occurs with a high probability of entering the third special game state and a predetermined number of game balls are won in the special prize-winning device 38, a high-probability transition lottery is performed. For this reason, in a state where the third special game state having a lower gaming value than the first and second special game states is likely to occur, that is, in the state where the first and second special game states are less likely to occur. Even so, the player can have an expectation for the occurrence of the third special gaming state.

  The gaming machine of the present invention has been specifically described above based on the embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be appropriately changed without departing from the gist thereof.

  In addition, the embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. Furthermore, you may apply combining the structure of the above-mentioned embodiment and modification. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  For example, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiments and modifications. For example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use this game ball.

  Further, the variable display device of the present invention is not limited to the display device 41, and may be, for example, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, or the display apparatus 41 and the special figure. Both 1 display 51 and special figure 2 display 52 may be sufficient.

10 gaming machine 30 gaming board 32 game area 34 universal start gate 36 start winning opening (first start winning area)
37 Ordinary variable prize device (second start prize area, start prize device)
38 Special variable prize device (variable prize device)
41 Display device (variable display device)
41a Display unit 100 Game control device (control means, winning winning state generation means, determination means, probability setting means,
High probability transition lottery means, starting storage means, variable display game executing means, priority means,
Pre-start determination means, falling lottery means, specific game state information setting means)
111A CPU (game state control means, reach state generation means)
300 effect control device (determination result notification means, specific game state information setting means,
Specific production execution control means)

Claims (6)

A variable display device having a display unit capable of displaying a variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information based on a winning of a game ball in a start winning area in the game area, and a first in which a game ball cannot be won A variable winning device that is convertible to a state and a second state in which a game ball can be won, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, the variable winning device is set to the second state. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that converts and gives a predetermined gaming value to the player,
The start winning area is provided with a start winning device that can be converted into a guided state that guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the start winning area and a non-guided state that does not guide,
The special game state includes a first special game state and a second special game state having a lower game value to be given to the player than the first special game state,
Game execution control means capable of controlling the execution of the variable display game;
A probability state control means capable of controlling a probability state in which the special gaming state occurs in the gaming machine;
An easy-to-win state generating means capable of generating an easy-to-win state for the induction state over a second time longer than a normal state in which the start winning device is in the induction state for a first time; ,
The probability state control means includes:
In a predetermined probability state, when the second special gaming state is generated by a variable display game based on a winning of a game ball to the start winning device in which the winning easy state is generated by the winning easy state generating means,
When the second special gaming state occurs, the probability state after the end of the second special gaming state can be controlled according to the winning mode of the game ball to the variable winning device converted to the second state. A gaming machine characterized by being. When the probability state controlled by the probability state control means is a normal probability state,
The winning easy state generating means is:
The winning ease state is generated with a predetermined probability,
The game execution control means includes
In the variable display game based on the winning of a game ball to the start winning device in which the winning easy state is generated by the winning easy state generating means, the start winning area where the easy winning state has not occurred is entered. Generating the second special gaming state with a higher probability than a variable display game based on a winning game ball;
The probability state control means includes:
When the second special gaming state is generated by the game execution control means,
When the second special gaming state occurs, the probability state after the end of the second special gaming state can be controlled according to the number of game balls won in the variable winning device converted to the second state. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein: The probability state control means includes:
After the end of the first special gaming state, controlling a probability state in which the second special gaming state occurs for a predetermined period, which is higher than the normal probability state,
When the second special game state is generated by the variable display game during the predetermined period, the game ball is awarded to the variable winning device converted to the second state when the second special game state is generated. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the probability state after the end of the predetermined period can be controlled accordingly. The probability state control means includes:
A plurality of probability states as the controllable probability states;
When the second special game state is generated by the variable display game in the predetermined period, when the second special game state is generated, the number of game balls won in the variable winning device converted to the second state is calculated. Based on this, it is possible to control which probability state of the plurality of probability states is the probability state in which the special gaming state occurs after the end of the predetermined period. The gaming machine described. The plurality of probability states include a plurality of probability states in which the second special gaming state occurs in the predetermined period,
The probability state control means includes:
According to the type of special result in the variable display game that generated the first special gaming state that triggered the start of the predetermined period, the probability state that the second special gaming state will occur in the predetermined period, The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein any one of a plurality of probability states can be set. The variable winning device is:
A first variable winning device and a second variable winning device;
The control means includes
2. The first variable winning device and the second variable winning device are appropriately converted into the first state or the second state, respectively, according to the state of the special gaming state that is generated. The gaming machine according to any one of 5 to 5.

Images